JP5983459B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, a game ball is used as a game medium. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the game ball launch mechanism based on the player's launch operation. Then, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when the launched game ball enters the entrance portion provided in the game area (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-236080 A

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, it is preferable that management of game media to be used is appropriately performed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably managing gaming media.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a storage unit for storing game balls;
Launching means for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Within a range of information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means, the launch control means for enabling the launch of the game balls by the launch means;
Specific entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Variable entry means provided in the gaming area, capable of transitioning to an open state and capable of transitioning to a closed state;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the specific entry means;
A determination unit that executes a determination process on the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Production control means for controlling the production execution means so that the production is executed;
State transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed after the determination result of the determining means becomes the specific determination result;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on a game ball entering the variable pitching means;
With
A configuration in which a player directly throws a game ball into the storage unit is suppressed,
The production control means includes
An execution control unit that causes an effect determined to be executed by an effect lottery performed based on the content of the special information to be executed by the effect execution unit;
When the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means corresponds to the number of game balls equal to or less than a reference number. In the case where the production lottery is performed, the production included in the production lottery of the production lottery is not related to the result of the production lottery at the timing before the transition to the specific gaming state is triggered by the special information. A specific control means that is executed, or an effect different from the effect corresponding to the result of the effect lottery and the effect included in the lottery of the effect lottery is executed;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, management of game media can be suitably performed.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of the state where the front door was removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a main body base. (A) It is a top view of a dish formation part, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a dish formation part. (A) It is a top view which expands and shows a part of main body base, (b) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of a game ball | bowl launching mechanism, (c) For demonstrating the structure of a ball feeder It is a schematic diagram. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the state where the payout control device, the launch control device, the second power supply device and each relay board are removed. (A), (b) It is a perspective view which expands and shows a part of support base body, Comprising: It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the structure for returning the game ball discharged | emitted from the game area | region to a ball tray part. . It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in management side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of the input port of main side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the winning detection process performed by main side MPU, (b) The structure of the 1st winning determination area, the 2nd winning determination area, the 1st post calculation area, and the 2nd post calculation area is demonstrated. It is explanatory drawing for doing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination process performed in main side MPU. (A) It is a timing chart for demonstrating the timing which monitors each winning information, (B) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the calculation performed when winning determination is performed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success / failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process for ball | bowl supply performed with management side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball management process performed in payout side MPU. (A)-(c) It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge management process performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process performed with a launch control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the management process of the game ball | bowl use performed by payout side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows a mode that the number of usable game balls is increased / decreased. It is a flowchart which shows the return management process performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process for a partial return performed in the payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process for medium supply performed in management side MPU. (A)-(d) It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) It is sectional drawing of a game ball, (b) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the IC tag embed | buried under a game ball. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ID registration performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge | emission management process at the time of ID registration performed with the payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process for ID registration performed with a launch control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows ID acquisition processing performed in payout side MPU. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows a mode that the specific number of game balls are stored in the ball tray part, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the launch aspect of a game ball in case ID information is registered. (C) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating ID information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the ID monitoring process performed in payout side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the content of the monitoring process of ID information, and the content when 1st ID abnormality generate | occur | produces. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the hold notice performed by main side MPU, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of jackpot result, (c) In order to explain a hold storage area It is explanatory drawing of. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining ball corresponding | compatible process performed in main side MPU. (A) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of the operation part for performing partial return in 2nd Embodiment, (b) The management process for partial return performed by payout side MPU is shown. It is a flowchart. (A) It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure for performing partial return in 3rd Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the management process for partial return performed in payout side MPU. . It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of the outlet 72 of the ball tray part 71 in the 4th Embodiment, and its vicinity. It is a flowchart which shows the number monitoring process performed in payout side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating operation | movement of the pachinko machine when the number of game balls is monitored. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. (A) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of the outlet of a ball tray part, and its vicinity, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the stabilization process of the storage ball | bowl performed in payout side MPU. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure for removing the non-regular game ball in 6th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the illegal ball detection process performed in payout side MPU. (A), (b) It is a perspective view for demonstrating the structure of the pachinko machine and front door in other embodiment. (A), (b) It is the perspective view and front view for demonstrating the structure of the pachinko machine in other embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 which expands and shows a part for explaining a modification. (A) It is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 which expands and shows a part for explaining a modification, and (b) is a flow chart which shows door opening monitoring processing performed in the main side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice in a modification, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the storage area in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a pending | holding notice performed with an audio | voice emission control apparatus. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the change process of the production content performed with an audio | voice light emission control apparatus, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a 1st change process, (c) It is a 2nd change process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is a so-called enclosed game machine (an enclosed ball game machine, an enclosed pachinko machine, an enclosed ball pachinko machine).

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the so-called island facility of the game hall with nails or the like.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes a main body base 21 and a front door 22 disposed in front of the main body base 21. The main body base 21 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. Further, the front door 22 is rotatably supported by the main body base 21 and can be rotated forward with the same side as the side on which the main body base 21 is supported with respect to the outer frame 11 as a support side. Has been.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door 22 is locked to the main body base 21 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 23 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Specifically, the locking device and the cylinder lock 23 are provided on the main body base 21. The surface of the cylinder lock 23 in which the key hole is formed is exposed to the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 through the exposure recess 24 formed in the front door 22. The front door 22 is provided with a front hook hook portion (not shown) protruding rearward. When the front door 22 is closed, the front hook hook portion is received by the front hook receiving portion of the locking device. As a result, the front door 22 is locked to the main body base 21. Then, by inserting an unlocking key into the cylinder lock 23 and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the front side hook receiving portion is displaced in the unlocking direction, and the engagement state between the front side hook receiving portion and the front side hook receiving portion is released. Is done. Thereby, the locked state of the front door 22 with respect to the main body base 21 is cancelled | released.

  On the other hand, the locking device is provided with a rear hook hook portion (not shown) protruding rearward, and when the main body base 21 is closed, the rear hook hook portion is a rear hook receiving portion of the outer frame 11. The main body base 21 is locked to the outer frame 11 by being received by the part. Then, by inserting an unlocking key into the cylinder lock 23 and rotating it in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the rear hook hook portion is displaced in the unlocking direction, and the rear hook hook portion and the rear hook receiver The engagement state with the part is released. Thereby, the locked state of the main body base 21 with respect to the outer frame 11 is cancelled | released.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front door 22 removed. As shown in FIG. 3, the main body base 21 includes a support base body 31 formed of a synthetic resin. The support base body 31 has a horizontal dimension substantially the same as the horizontal dimension of the outer frame 11, and the vertical dimension of the support base body 31 is the upper edge of the upper frame part 11 b from the upper surface of the lower frame part 11 a in the outer frame 11. It is substantially the same as the height dimension up to. Therefore, when the main body base 21 is closed to the outer frame 11, the back surface of the main body base 21 overlaps the upper frame portion 11b and the left and right side frame portions 11c and 11d of the outer frame 11 from the front.

  The support base body 31 is formed with an exposure hole 32 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A game board 33 is mounted on the support base body 31 from the back side so as to be exposed to the front surface side of the support base body 31 through the exposure hole 32. Here, the structure of the game board 33 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 33.

  The game board 33 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning port 41, a variable winning device 42, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 43, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 44, and a through hole. A gate 45, a variable display unit 46, a special drawing display unit 47, a universal drawing display unit 48, and the like are provided. In addition, three general winning openings 41 are provided, two through gates 45 are provided, and one other each is provided.

  The detection sensors 41a, 41b, 41c, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a, one-to-one correspondence to each general winning port 41, variable winning device 42, upper operating port 43, lower operating port 44 and each through gate 45 are provided. 45b is provided. These detection sensors 41a to 45b are all disposed on the back side of the game board 33, and the detection results are output to a main control device described later. In addition, as the detection sensors 41a to 45b, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors that detect changes in the magnetic field are used, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball, for example, An optical sensor may be used.

  When the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning port 41, the variable winning device 42, the upper operating port 43, and the lower operating port 44 is detected, a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the player as winning balls. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, three winning balls are generated when a ball enters the upper working port 43 and when a ball enters the lower working port 44. Ten winning balls are generated when the player enters the winning ball, and fifteen winning balls are generated when the player enters the variable winning device 42. However, the number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the lower operation port 43 is different from the number of prize balls in the lower operation port 44. May be. Further, the variable winning device 42 is not limited to a configuration in which the number of winning balls is larger than the number of other winning balls, and may be configured to be smaller than the number of winning balls in the general winning slot 41, for example.

  In addition, an out port 49a is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 33, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 49a. The game board 33 is provided with a large number of nails 49b in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball and various members such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 49a, the general winning port 41, the variable winning device 42, the upper operating port 43, the lower operating port 44, or the through gate 45 are inserted. The entry of a game ball is also expressed as a prize.

  The variable winning device 42 includes a large winning opening 42b that leads to the back side of the game board 33, and an open / close door 42c that opens and closes the large winning opening 42b. The open / close door 42c is connected to a variable winning drive unit 42d provided integrally as the variable winning device 42, and is driven by the variable winning drive unit 42d to be arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot win, and the game ball can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win when it is elected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery. In addition, the variable winning device 42 is provided with a big prize opening detection sensor 42a so that a detection unit exists at a position where a game ball won through the big prize opening 42b always passes. The game balls that have won the variable winning device 42 are individually detected by the special winning opening detection sensor 42a.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the upper operating port 43 and the lower operating port 44 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 33. Both the upper working port 43 and the lower working port 44 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 43 and 44 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 43 is on the upper side. The lower working port 44 is provided with a pair of left and right electric accessories 44b.

  The electric combination 44b is connected to an electric combination drive unit 44c mounted on the back side of the game board 33, and is driven by the electric combination drive unit 44c to be placed in either a closed state or an open state. . In the closed state of the electric accessory 44b, the game ball cannot be won in the lower operating port 44, and when the electric accessory 44b is in the open state, it is possible to win in the lower operating port 44.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a motorized state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 44 is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which a winning is not impossible but the above winning is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the accessory 44b is switched. Further, the electric accessory 44b may be omitted, and the switching between the state where the winning is likely to occur and the state where the winning is less likely to occur is performed by the displacement of the lower operation port 44 itself.

  In the special figure display unit 47, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper working port 43 or the lower working port 44 as a trigger, and the winning of the upper working port 43 or the lower working port 44 as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the above is clearly displayed. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 43 and the winning to the lower working port 44 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is performed based on the winning to the upper working port 43 or the lower working port 44. The result of the internal lottery is displayed in the special figure display section 47 which is a common display area. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 43 or the lower operating port 44 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a special stop result is displayed on the special figure display unit 47. Is displayed and the variable display is stopped, and then the mode is changed to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, since the special figure display unit 47 displays different results for each type of lottery result, the manager of the game hall can easily check the lottery result visually by checking the special figure display unit 47. be able to.

  The special figure display unit 47 is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the special figure display unit 47, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the usual figure display section 48, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 45 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 45 is clearly shown as a result of stopping the variation display. Is done. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 45 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state of the electric role, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the general map display unit 48 and a change display is displayed. After it is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility release state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 44b provided in the lower operation port 44 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 46 is provided with a symbol display device 46a for variably displaying a symbol which is a kind of a pattern, and a center frame 46b is disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 46a. The symbol display device 46a is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 46a is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

  In the symbol display device 46a, the variation display of the symbol is started based on winning in the upper working port 43 or the lower working port 44. That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 47, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 46a accordingly.

  For details of the contents of the variable display, three symbol rows of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas on the display surface of the symbol display device 46a. Each symbol row is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols with any number from “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of the numbers in the upper symbol row, and a sub symbol is 1 between each main symbol. It is arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row, nine types of main symbols with any number from “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. ing.

  That is, the upper symbol row and the lower symbol row are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. “4” main symbols are additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display surface, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In addition, five effective lines are set on the display surface.

  When a game-playing effect is performed on the display surface based on a winning at the upper operating port 43 or the lower operating port 44, a variable display is displayed so that the symbols in each symbol row are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Be started. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row, and finally the effect for the game round is ended in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each symbol row. .

  In addition, when the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of the most advantageous jackpot result, which will be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same odd number is attached to any active line is formed. In the game times corresponding to the occurrence of a low probability winning result to be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same even number is attached to any one of the active lines is formed. In addition, in the game times corresponding to the occurrence of a low winning and winning big hit result which will be described later, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “3. 4.1 ") is formed.

  In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 43, 44, the variation display is started in the special symbol display unit 47 and the symbol display device 46a, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variation display is stopped. Corresponds to one game time.

  Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 46a is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Further, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 46a is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a number may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a first reserved lamp portion 46c corresponding to the special symbol display portion 47 and the symbol display device 46a is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 46b. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operation port 43 or the lower operation port 44 are reserved, and the number of the game balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 46c is turned on.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 46b, a second holding lamp portion 46d corresponding to the general map display portion 48 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 45 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the second holding lamp portion 46d. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance lamp | ramp part 46c, 46d is fulfill | performed by the display in the one part area | region of the symbol display apparatus 46a.

  An inner rail portion 33a and an outer rail portion 33b are attached to the game board 33, and the inner rail portion 33a and the outer rail portion 33b constitute a guide rail. As shown in FIG. 3, a game ball launching mechanism 34 is provided below the game board 33 on the front surface of the support base body 31, and the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 34 are played by the guide rail. Guided to the top of the area.

  A lower cover body 35 is provided on the lower end side of the support base body 31. The lower cover body 35 is provided so as to extend from the lower end portion of the support base body 31 over a predetermined range in the height direction, and the support base body 31 is supported by the lower cover body 35 in the range in the height direction. The front of is covered from the front. The range in the height direction in which the lower cover body 35 is provided includes a part of the game ball launching mechanism 34, and in this range, the game ball launching mechanism 34 includes the lower cover body 35, the support base body 31, and the like. It exists in the space between the front and back. The lower cover body 35 exists on the support base body 31 side regardless of whether the front door 22 is opened. That is, the lower cover body 35 constitutes the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A launch operation device 36 is provided at the right end of the lower cover body 35 so as to protrude forward of the pachinko machine 10. The firing operation device 36 includes an operation base 36a provided to project forward, and an operation handle 36b provided to be rotatably supported by the operation base 36a. The operation handle 36b is operated to rotate. As a result, the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 34 is adjusted. The launch operation device 36 includes a touch sensor 36c for detecting that the operation handle 36b is touched by the player, a variable resistor 36d for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 36b, A stop switch 36e is provided that is operated to stop the launch of the game ball even when the operation handle 36b is being operated by the player. In the situation where the operation handle 36b is disposed at the initial position, the stop switch 36e is automatically turned on by the operation handle 36b.

  When a game ball is launched based on a launch operation by the player, both conditions that the touch sensor 36c detects that the operation handle 36b is touched and that the stop switch 36e is not turned on are both conditions. When established, the game ball is launched with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation detected through the variable resistor 36d.

  On the center side of the lower cover body 35, the speaker device 37 that outputs sound effects according to the game situation is covered from the front, and the sound output from the speaker device 37 can be transmitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10. A speaker cover 38 is provided. The speaker device 37 is provided on the support base body 31 (see FIG. 5).

  The front door 22 is provided so as to cover the entire area above the lower cover body 35 on the front surface of the support base body 31. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door 22 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window part 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 52 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, it is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. Incidentally, the display surface of the symbol display device 46a, the special figure display unit 47, and the like are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52.

  Various light emitting portions 53 and 54 are provided around the window portion 51. An abnormality notification light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window 51 as part of the various light emitting units 53 and 54. Also, a pair of left and right effect light emitting sections 54 are provided on the left and right sides of the abnormality notification light emitting section 53.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a dish forming portion 55 is provided below the window portion 51 of the front door 22 so as to bulge to the near side. The dish forming part 55 is formed so that a large number of game balls can be stored, and the game balls stored in the dish forming part 55 are guided to the game ball launching mechanism 34 and fired toward the game area. . The configuration of the dish forming portion 55 will be described in detail later. By the way, in addition to the dish forming portion 55, a portion for storing game balls is not provided on the front side of the front door 22.

  As described above, the front door 22 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body base 21. However, as shown in FIG. 3, the front door 22 is opened on the support base body 31 of the main body base 21. An open detection switch 39 is provided for detecting whether or not it is closed (or whether it is closed). The opening detection switch 39 has a pin that can be projected and retracted from the front surface of the support base body 31. When the front door 22 is closed in the main body base 21, the pin is pushed to detect the closing of the front door 22. When the door 22 is opened, the pin returns to the protruding position, and the opening of the front door 22 is detected.

  Incidentally, the opening detection switch 39 outputs an HI level opening detection signal to a main control device 61 described later when the front door 22 is in an open state, and the LOW level to the main control device 61 when the front door 22 is in a closed state. However, the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the main body base 21 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the main body base 21.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a main control device 61 having a function of controlling the main game, a sound light emission control device 62 that performs sound output control and light emission control based on a command from the main control device 61, and sound light emission control A display control device 63 that performs display control of the symbol display device 46a based on a command from the device 62, a payout control device 64 that performs control related to lending of game balls and giving of game value, and launch control that performs launch control of game balls. The apparatus 65 includes a first power supply device 66 and a second power supply device 67 that supply power to the various control devices 61 to 65. Among these, the main control device 61, the sound emission control device 62, the display control device 63, and the first power supply device 66 are mounted on the back surface of the game board 33, and the game board 33 is removed from the support base body 31. When removed, these devices 61 to 63 and 66 follow the game board 33 side.

  On the other hand, the payout control device 64, the launch control device 65, and the second power supply device 67 are mounted on the back surface of the support base body 31, and even if the game board 33 is removed from the support base body 31, these devices 64, 65 and 67 remain on the support base body 31 side. In this case, the launch control device 65 and the payout control device 64 are mounted one after the other. Specifically, the launch control device 65 is mounted on the back surface of the support base body 31, and the payout control device 64 thereafter It is installed in the direction. Accordingly, the payout control device 64 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to other control devices such as the main control device 61 and the launch control device 65.

  Here, the various control devices 61 to 65 and the power supply devices 66 and 67 are configured such that corresponding substrates are accommodated in a substrate box. The main control device 61 and the payout control device 64 will be described in detail. The main control device 61 includes a main control board (not shown), and the main control board is accommodated in the board box 61a. The payout control device 64 includes a payout control board (not shown), and the payout control board is accommodated in the board box 64a. These substrate boxes 61a and 64a are formed to be transparent so that the corresponding substrates can be visually confirmed from the outside of the substrate boxes 61a and 64a. Further, the main controller 61 is provided with a first erasing button 61b and a second erasing button 61c on the surface that faces the back of the pachinko machine 10 when the main body base 21 is closed to the outer frame 11. .

  It is preferable that the substrate boxes 61a and 64a are provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board boxes 61a and 64a are joined in a non-separable manner, and a construction of a joint portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is adhered at the time of peeling A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the object is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise the board | substrate boxes 61a and 64a can be considered.

  On the back side of the support base body 31, a payout-side relay board 68 for relaying the electrical connection between the payout control device 64 and a management unit 131 described later is provided. Further, on the back side of the support base body 31, a relay board 69 on the power source side is provided which relays the commercial power supply of the game hall and the first power supply device 66 and relays the commercial power supply and the second power supply device 67. It has been. The relay board 69 on the power supply side is provided with a power switch 69a that can be turned on and off. When the power switch 69a is turned on, the supply of power from the commercial power supply to the first power supply device 66 and the supply of power from the commercial power supply to the second power supply device 67 are started simultaneously, and the power switch 69a is turned off. As a result, the supply of power from the commercial power supply to the first power supply device 66 and the supply of power from the commercial power supply to the second power supply device 67 are simultaneously stopped.

<Configuration for circulating game balls>
Next, a configuration for circulating game balls will be described. Among the configurations for circulation, first, the configuration of the dish forming portion 55 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 in addition to FIG. 6A is a plan view of the dish forming portion 55, and FIG. 6B is a longitudinal sectional view of the dish forming portion 55. In FIG. 6A, the dish cover 75 provided in the dish forming portion 55 is omitted.

  The dish forming portion 55 is formed of a colored and opaque synthetic resin, and is formed so as to protrude forward of the pachinko machine 10 and extends in the lateral direction, as shown in FIG. The left end of the dish forming portion 55 is located on the left end side of the front door 22 from the lateral center, and the right end of the dish forming portion 55 is on the right end side of the front door 22 from the lateral center. Is located.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the dish forming part 55 is formed with a ball dish part 71 extending in the horizontal direction. The ball tray 71 is formed so as to partition a space having a predetermined depth dimension, and is formed so as to open the partitioned space upward.

  On the left end side of the ball tray portion 71, an outlet 72 for leading the game ball B <b> 1 existing on the back side of the front door 22 to the ball tray portion 71 is formed, and on the right end side of the ball tray portion 71 An introduction port 73 for guiding the game ball B1 existing in the ball tray 71 to the game ball launching mechanism 34 is formed. The bottom surface of the ball tray portion 71 is formed to be inclined downward from the outlet port 72 side to the inlet port 73 side, and the game ball B1 existing in the ball tray portion 71 is directed toward the inlet port 73 by its own weight. It will flow down.

  The ball tray portion 71 is formed so that the outlet 72 side is wider than the inlet 73 side, that is, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger. Specifically, a plurality (for example, six) are provided on the outlet 72 side. The game balls B1 are formed so as to be aligned in the width direction. Thereby, the ball tray portion 71 can store a large number of game balls, and specifically, the ball tray portion 71 is formed so as to be able to store at least 150 game balls B1.

  On the other hand, the predetermined range from the introduction port 73 toward the upstream side is formed as an alignment region 74 in which the game balls B1 can be aligned in a row in the horizontal direction. In this case, the position of the rear side wall portion of the alignment region 74 is the same position in the front-rear direction as the position of the rear side wall portion in the upstream region from the alignment region 74. Incidentally, the area in front of the outlet 72 in the ball tray 71 is the widest area. Between the wide area and the alignment area 74, the front wall portion of the ball tray 71 becomes the alignment area 74. It is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear side as it goes.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the dish forming unit 55 is provided with a dish cover 75 so as to cover the ball dish part 71 from above. The dish cover 75 is formed in a plate shape, and is provided at the upper end portion of the ball dish part 71 so as to cover the ball dish part 71 from above. However, the tray cover 75 and the bottom surface of the ball tray portion 71 are separated from each other by a plurality of game balls B1 in the vertical direction, and a large number of game balls are placed on the ball tray portion 71 even when the plate cover 75 is attached. B1, specifically, at least 150 game balls B1 can be stored. The dish cover 75 is transparent (specifically, colorless and transparent) using a synthetic resin such as polycarbonate so that the game balls stored in the ball tray part 71 can be visually confirmed through the dish cover 75. Is formed.

  The dish cover 75 has a region that covers the ball dish part 71 from above, and a cover main body part 75 a provided so that the upper surface and the lower surface are horizontal or substantially horizontal, and a flange that exists on the back side of the dish forming part 55. The part 75b is integrally formed. The cover main body portion 75 a is formed to match the shape of the ball tray portion 71 and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer edge shape of the ball tray portion 71. The cover main body portion 75a extends from a portion forming the back wall 71a of the ball tray portion 71 in the plate forming portion 55 to a portion forming the side wall 71b and the front wall 71c.

  Specifically, the back wall 71a is formed with an insertion hole 76 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and can be inserted through the cover main body 75a. The cover main body portion 75 a is inserted above the ball tray portion 71 by being inserted into the insertion hole portion 76 from the back side of the tray forming portion 55. A fitting recess 77 is formed in the side wall 71b and the front wall 71c at the same height as the insertion hole 76 so as to be recessed inward. In the cover main body 75 a, the entire peripheral edge of the region existing in front of the insertion hole 76 enters the fitting recess 77. As a result, the upper surface opening of the ball tray part 71 is entirely covered with the dish cover 75, and a boundary surface in the direction intersecting the vertical direction is generated at the boundary between the ball dish part 71 and the dish cover 75. ing. Further, in a state where the peripheral edge of the cover main body portion 75a enters the fitting recess 77, the flange portion 75b of the plate cover 75 contacts the back surface portion of the plate forming portion 55 from the rear as shown in FIG. You will be in touch.

  In the configuration in which the peripheral edge portion of the cover main body portion 75a enters the fitting recess 77, the dish forming portion 55 and the dish cover 75 are fixed by using screws 78a as fixtures in the region where the penetration occurs. . As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality (for example, 20) of the fixing points 78 are intermittently provided along the region where the intrusion occurs. Further, in the configuration in which the flange portion 75b of the plate cover 75 is in contact with the back surface portion of the plate forming portion 55, the plate forming portion 55 and the plate cover 75 use a screw 79 as a fixture in the contact region. Is fixed. The screwing is performed from behind the dish forming portion 55.

  Due to the above configuration, since the ball tray portion 71 is covered with the plate cover 75 and the separation of the plate cover 75 is prevented, the ball tray portion 71 is stored in the state where the plate cover 75 is provided. It is impossible to touch the game ball B1 that has been made and to throw the game ball B1 into the ball tray portion 71. In addition, at the boundary between the dish forming portion 55 and the dish cover 75, there is a boundary surface in a direction intersecting the vertical direction due to the vertical overlap between the two. This makes it impossible to touch the game ball B1 through the boundary between the two.

  On the other hand, the fixing release operation is performed on the fixing portion 78 of the cover main body 75a, and the front door 22 is opened with respect to the main body base 21, and the fixing release operation is performed on the fixing portion of the flange portion 75b from the back side of the dish forming portion 55. By performing the above, the dish cover 75 can be removed. As a result, when a ball clogging or the like occurs in the ball tray portion 71, it is possible to perform maintenance such as eliminating the ball clogging. Further, in order to remove the dish cover 75, not only the fixing release operation but also the opening operation of the front door 22 is required, so that it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of removing the dish cover 75 illegally.

  In addition, you may make it the said fixing | fixed part 78 not expose outside by providing another cover member so that the fixing | fixed part 78 of the dish formation part 55 and the cover main-body part 75a may be covered. The dish cover 75 and the dish forming unit 55 may be fixed only on the back side of the dish forming unit 55.

  The game balls B1 stored in the ball tray portion 71 are aligned in the alignment region 74 as described above, and then guided to the game ball launching mechanism 34 side through the introduction port 73. The configuration on the derivation destination side will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 7A is an enlarged front view showing a part of the main body base 21, and FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration of the game ball launching mechanism 34. FIG. These are the schematic diagrams for demonstrating the structure of the ball feeder 86 for supplying the game ball | bowl B1 stored by the ball tray part 71 to the game ball | bowl launching mechanism 34 side.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the game ball launching mechanism 34 is provided on the front surface of the support base body 31 in the main body base 21. As shown in FIG. 7B, the game ball launching mechanism 34 uses a launch rail 81 extending toward the guide rail formed on the game board 33 and the game ball B1 supplied on the launch rail 81 as a guide rail. A solenoid 82 that is an electric actuator that is fired toward the head, and a holding member 83 that holds one game ball B1 supplied on the firing rail 81 at a position where the solenoid 82 can be launched. .

  The support base 31 includes a launch ball detection sensor 84 for detecting the game ball B1 held by the holding member 83 on the launch rail 81, and a reader device 85 for reading ID information from the game ball B1. Is provided.

  The shot ball detection sensor 84 is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and outputs and holds a HI level signal as a shot ball detection signal in a situation where the game ball B1 is held by the holding member 83. In a situation where the game ball B1 is not held by the member 83, a LOW level signal is output as a shot ball detection signal. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the game ball B1 has been supplied onto the launch rail 81 and that the supplied game ball B1 has been launched by the shot ball detection sensor 84.

  The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the launch ball detection sensor 84 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method. However, in order not to adversely affect the reading of the ID information in the reader device 85, it is preferable that the firing ball detection sensor 84 is a sensor that does not generate much magnetic field. These sensors are preferred. Details of the reader device 85 will be described later.

  On the launch rail 81, the game balls B1 stored in the ball tray portion 71 are supplied one by one by the ball feeding device 86. The ball feeding device 86 is provided behind the introduction port 73 in the ball tray portion 71 on the back surface of the front door 22. As shown in FIG. 7C, the ball feeding device 86 receives a ball feeding passage 87 continuing from the introduction port 73 of the ball tray 71 and the game ball B1 guided by the ball feeding passage 87 from below 1 A supply member 88 for supplying the ball on the firing rail 81 one by one, a receiving position for allowing the game ball B1 to be received from the ball feed passage 87, and a supply position for supplying the received game ball B1 to the firing rail 81 And a ball feed drive unit 89 that rotates the supply member 88 between them. The ball feed drive unit 89 is a drive unit that places the supply member 88 at the receiving position by using magnetic attraction and releases the suction to place the supply member 88 at the supply position. For example, a rotary motor may be used.

  When the game ball B1 is fired through operation of the launch operation device 36 or the like, one ball is fed by the ball feeding device 86 when a condition for firing one game ball B1 is satisfied. A game ball B1 is supplied onto the launch rail 81. The supplied game ball B1 is detected by a launch ball detection sensor 84. Thereafter, the solenoid 82 is driven and controlled, and one game ball B1 held on the launch rail 81 is launched toward the game area.

  Next, a configuration for returning the launched game ball B1 to the ball tray 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 in addition to FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 and shows a state in which the payout control device 64, the launch control device 65, the second power supply device 67, and the relay boards 68 and 69 are removed. 9A and 9B are perspective views showing a part of the support base body 31 in an enlarged manner, and the structure for returning the game ball B1 discharged from the game area to the ball tray 71 is disassembled. 9A is a perspective view of a part of the support base body 31 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 9B is a perspective view of a part of the support base body 31 as viewed from the rear. FIG.

  The game ball B1, which is launched by the game ball launch mechanism 34 and released from the guide rail of the game board 33 to the game area, flows down the game area while bouncing back to the nail 49b or the windmill. Then, the game ball B1 that has entered the general winning port 41, the variable winning device 42, the upper operating port 43, the lower operating port 44 or the out port 49a is guided to the back side of the game board 33.

  As shown in FIG. 8, a collective path forming body 91 is provided on the back surface of the game board 33, and the collective path formed by using the collective path forming body 91 and the back surface of the game board 33 is divided. The game board 33 is guided to a predetermined area at the lower end. The game ball B1 guided to the predetermined area is collected by a discharge collection unit 101 formed on the back surface of the support base body 31 and below the game board 33.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the discharge collection unit 101 is formed by attaching the discharge collection member 102 to the back surface of the support base body 31 from the rear. As shown in FIG. 8, the discharge collecting unit 101 is provided so as to extend in the lateral direction. In this case, the discharge collecting part 101 exists from the vicinity of the center in the lateral direction of the support base body 31 to the outlet 72 side of the ball tray 71, and the end on the outlet 72 side is the outlet. The whole 72 is opposed from the rear.

  The discharge collecting unit 101 is formed as a space having a predetermined depth dimension, specifically, a depth dimension equal to or more than two game balls B1, and the space is opened upward. Yes. Further, the bottom surface 103 of the discharge collecting unit 101 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the end of the ball tray 71 on the outlet 72 side.

  The game ball B1 that has flowed into the collective passage is led out to the discharge collecting unit 101 at a position near the lower end of the game board 33 and opposite to the lead-out port 72 side. The game ball B1 led out to the discharge collecting unit 101 descends by its own weight on the bottom surface 103 of the discharge collecting unit 101 and reaches a communication port 104 formed so as to penetrate the support base body 31 back and forth (see FIG. 9 (b)).

  The communication port 104 is formed so as to communicate the outlet 72 of the ball tray 71 and the discharge collecting unit 101, and the front region thereof is directed forward from the surrounding surface on the front surface of the support base body 31. Projecting. As shown in FIG. 9A, a shutter mechanism 105 is provided at the front opening protruding forward.

  The shutter mechanism 105 is provided so as to be displaceable between a blocking position that prevents the game ball from passing through the front opening and an allowable position that allows the game ball B1 to flow into the outlet 72 while allowing the game ball to pass therethrough. The shutter member 106 is provided. The shutter member 106 is rotatably supported by a shutter support portion 107 with the lower end portion as a rotation axis. When the front door 22 is closed, a lead-out port forming portion (not shown) formed to protrude rearward from the surrounding surface on the back surface of the front door 22 enters, and the shutter member 106 is disposed at an allowable position. On the other hand, in the state where the front door 22 is opened, the state where the lead-out port forming portion enters is released, and the shutter member 106 is disposed at the blocking position. Accordingly, even if the front door 22 is opened in a state where the game ball B1 is present in the discharge collection unit 101, the game ball B1 in the discharge collection unit 101 is prevented from flowing out. .

  Incidentally, the outlet 72 of the ball tray 71 does not have a shutter function, and the state where the outlet 72 is opened rearward is maintained even when the front door 22 is opened. . On the other hand, the outlet 72 is inclined downward toward the storage space bulging forward of the pachinko machine 10 in the ball tray 71 and the bottom surface of the storage space is also directed toward the inlet 73 of the ball tray 71. Therefore, the game ball B1 stored in the ball tray 71 does not flow out when the front door 22 is opened.

  In a situation where the shutter member 106 is disposed at the allowable position, the game ball B1 that has reached the communication port 104 flows into the outlet 72. Since the outlet 72 is inclined downward toward the storage space of the ball tray 71 as described above, the game ball B1 that has reached the outlet 72 will eventually return to the storage space.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the discharge collecting unit 101 is provided with a ball polishing mechanism 111. The ball polishing mechanism 111 includes a ball polishing body 112 and a polishing drive unit 113. The ball polishing body 112 is provided so as to project in a radial direction around the ball polishing shaft portion 112a, and a ball polishing shaft portion 112a having a larger dimension in the axial direction than the horizontal dimension of the discharge collecting portion 101. And a brush-like ball polishing portion 112b. The ball polishing body 112 is accommodated in the discharge collecting unit 101 so that the axial direction thereof is the horizontal direction, and both ends in the horizontal direction protrude to the side of the discharge collecting unit 101. The protruding both end portions are supported in a rotatable state by a pair of support shaft portions 114 formed on the back surface of the support base body 31, respectively. Further, one end in the horizontal direction of the ball polishing body 112, specifically, the end on the outlet 72 side is connected to the polishing drive unit 113. The polishing drive unit 113 is composed of a rotary motor, and rotates the ball polishing body 112 in a predetermined direction while a drive signal is supplied.

  In the configuration in which the ball polishing body 112 is accommodated in the discharge collecting unit 101, the ball polishing body 112 allows the game ball B1 flowing into the discharge collecting unit 101 to flow down to the outlet 72 side, and The size and arrangement position are set so that the ball polishing portion 112b contacts the game ball B1 that flows down. Therefore, the game ball B1 collected in the discharge collection unit 101 is guided to the outlet 72 and polished by the ball polishing body 112 at the time of guidance.

  As described above, the game ball B1 that is launched by the game ball launching mechanism 34 and reaches the game area returns to the ball tray 71 through the discharge collecting unit 101, but depending on the launch strength, the game ball launching mechanism 34 There is also a game ball B1 that has been launched but returns to the guide rail without reaching the game area. In order to collect the game ball B1, as shown in FIGS. 7A and 9A, a return ball collection unit 121 is provided.

  The return ball collecting portion 121 is partitioned and formed by a wall portion formed integrally with a forming portion for partitioning and forming a front opening projecting forward of the support base body 31 at the communication port 104. It is formed on the front side. As shown in FIG. 7A, the return ball recovery unit 121 is formed in a region generated by separating the guide rail and the launch rail 81 in the lateral direction, and exists between the rails. ing.

  The return ball collecting unit 121 is formed as a space having a predetermined depth, and is formed by opening the space upward. In this case, the front wall portion 122 of the return ball collection unit 121 is formed so as to be inclined so that the firing rail 81 side is lower than the guide rail side. On the guide rail side, the depth dimension is equal to or greater than two game balls B1, whereas on the firing rail 81 side, the depth dimension is less than one game ball B1. Thereby, it is possible to reliably collect the return ball while preventing the return ball collecting unit 121 from obstructing the movement of the game ball B1 launched from the game ball launching mechanism 34 toward the guide rail. It becomes.

  The return ball collection unit 121 communicates with the communication port 104, and the bottom surface 123 of the return ball collection unit 121 is inclined downward toward the communication port 104. Accordingly, the game ball B1 collected by the return ball collection unit 121 descends the bottom surface 123 of the return ball collection unit 121 by its own weight and reaches the communication port 104. And the game ball B1 which reached | attained the communication port 104 is derived | led-out to the storage space of the ball tray part 71 on condition that the front door 22 is closed as already demonstrated.

  The return ball collection unit 121 is provided with a return ball detection sensor 124 for detecting the game ball B1 collected by the return ball collection unit 121. The return ball detection sensor 124 includes an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and outputs a HI level signal as a return ball detection signal to detect the game ball B1 when the game ball B1 is detected. In a situation where it is not, a LOW level signal is output as a return ball detection signal. In addition, the detection area of the return ball detection sensor 124 is set to a position where the game ball B1 collected by the return ball collection unit 121 always passes when the game ball B1 is led out to the communication port 104. Therefore, the game ball B1 collected by the return ball collection unit 121 can be reliably detected by the return ball detection sensor 124.

  The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. The return ball detection sensor 124 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be another detection type sensor. However, in order not to adversely affect the reading of the ID information in the reader device 85, the return sphere detection sensor 124 is preferably a sensor that does not generate much magnetic field. These sensors are preferred.

  By providing the discharge collecting unit 101 and the return ball collecting unit 121 as described above, it is assumed that a specific number of game balls B1 set in the pachinko machine 10 are launched by the game ball launching mechanism 34. Is also returned to the ball tray 71. Further, as already described, since the tray cover 71 is provided in the ball tray portion 71, it is impossible for the player to take out the game ball B1 stored in the ball tray portion 71. Thereby, the specific number of game balls B1 circulate in the pachinko machine 10.

<Configuration for Lending Game Ball B1 and Giving Storage Medium M>
Next, a configuration relating to the rental of the game ball B1 and the provision of the storage medium M will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, and 6A.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the actual game ball B1 is not lent out in response to the player's insertion of cash, but information on the number of game balls B1 that can be used for the inserted cash is stored internally. The game ball B1 can be used within the range of the stored number. Also, when a winning corresponding to the grant of the game ball B1 occurs, the actual game ball B1 is not awarded, but information on the number of the game balls B1 corresponding to the prize is stored internally, The stored number of game balls B1 can be used. Further, when it is desired that the stored information on the number of game balls B1 is given as the actual game value, the storage medium M in which the stored information on the number of game balls B1 is stored is a game. Provided to the person.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a management unit 131 is provided on the side of the outer frame 11 as an apparatus for performing the above-described cash insertion, storage medium M insertion, and storage medium M provision. . On the front side of the management unit 131, there are a cash insertion port 132 into which banknotes are inserted as cash, a medium insertion port 133 into which the storage medium M is inserted, and a medium discharge port 134 through which the storage medium M is discharged. It is provided in this order. In the management unit 131, a process for identifying a bill inserted from the cash slot 132, a process for outputting the information to the pachinko machine 10, a process for identifying the storage medium M loaded from the medium slot 133, and the information for the pachinko machine Processing to output to the machine 10, processing to write the information to the storage medium M in response to the instruction to write the information of the number of game balls B1 from the pachinko machine 10, discharge the storage medium M having the information written from the medium outlet 134 Execute the process to perform. Details of these processes will be described later.

  When cash is inserted into the management unit 131, an operation for instructing to convert the cash information into information on the number of usable game balls B1, and information on unused cash and available game balls An operation for instructing to discharge the information of the number B1 as the storage medium M is performed on the operation unit 141 provided in the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 6A, the operation unit 141 is provided in the dish forming portion 55. Specifically, as already described, the ball tray portion 71 formed in the dish forming portion 55 has a smaller width dimension in the alignment region 74, and accordingly, the ball tray portion 71 is sectioned in the dish forming portion 55. The upper and lower dimensions of the upper surface of the region to be performed are large in front of the alignment region 74. An operation unit 141 is provided in a region where the dimension in the front-rear direction is increased.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the operation unit 141 includes various operation buttons 142 to 146 as a ball supply button 142, a full return button 143, an increase instruction button 144, a decrease instruction button 145, and a partial return. And a determination button 146 for use. Further, as the various display units 147 and 148, a frequency display unit 147 and a remaining number display unit 148 are provided.

  The frequency display unit 147 displays information on cash that has been inserted and unused. For example, “100” is displayed when 10,000 yen is unused, and “10” is displayed when 10,000 yen is unused. In the remaining number display portion 148, information on the number of usable game balls B1 is displayed. For example, “10000” is displayed when the number of available game balls B1 is 10,000, and “1000” is displayed when the number is 1,000.

  The ball supply button 142 is operated to convert the frequency information into the number of usable game balls B1. In this case, the frequency information that can be converted for one operation of the ball supply button 142 is limited to a predetermined frequency (that is, a predetermined amount of cash), and specifically, a game in which the frequency information for 500 yen can be used. The number of spheres B1 is converted into information (for example, 125 pieces).

  The all return button 143 is operated to discharge the frequency information stored in the pachinko machine 10 and the information on the number of usable game balls B1 as the storage medium M. The increase instruction button 144, the decrease instruction button 145, and the partial return determination button 146 are operated so that a part of the information on the number of usable game balls B <b> 1 is discharged as the storage medium M. In this case, when the increase instruction button 144 is operated, information on the number of game balls B1 to be discharged increases, and when the decrease instruction button 145 is operated, the number of game balls B1 to be discharged is increased. When the information decreases and the decision button 146 for partial return is operated, the selected partial number of information is ejected as the storage medium M.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 61 includes a main control board 151 that controls the main game, a first power failure monitoring board 155 that monitors the supply status of power from the first power supply device 66, and an outside of the board box 61a in the main control apparatus 61. Are provided with a first erasing button 61b and a second erasing button 61c which are provided so as to be pressed.

  An MPU 152 is mounted on the main control board 151. The MPU 152 includes a ROM 153 and an RWM 154.

  The ROM 153 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply for storage and retention, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The ROM 153 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 152 and fixed value data. The RWM 154 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing. The time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 153 when compared with the data capacity. The RWM 154 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 153. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 152 or the main control board 151 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The MPU 152 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 152 are a first power failure monitoring board 155, a first erase button 61b, and a second erase button 61c provided in the main controller 61.

  The first power failure monitoring board 155 relays between the main control board 151 and the first power supply device 66 and further monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the first power supply device 66. When the monitored voltage becomes less than 5 volts, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 152 on the assumption that a power failure has occurred in the first power supply device 66.

  The first power supply device 66 is connected to a commercial power supply of the game hall, and supplies operating power to the electrical equipment mounted on the game board 33 in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the first power supply device 66 is connected to the main control device 61, the sound emission control device 62, the display control device 63, and the various drive units 42 d and 44 c and the various display units 47 and 48 mounted on the game board 33. Supply operating power.

  Even when the supply of operating power from the commercial power supply to the first power supply device 66 is stopped, the first power supply device 66 has backup power to the RWM 154 so that the RWM 154 can store and store data. A power supply unit for power interruption (not shown) is provided. The power supply unit for power interruption is a rechargeable type such as a capacitor, and charging is performed when operating power is supplied from the commercial power supply to the first power supply device 66. Data is stored and retained in the RWM 154 for a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days) even during a power outage due to backup power from the power supply unit for power interruption.

  In addition to the electrical equipment mounted on the game board 33, electrical equipment such as various light emitting units 53 and 54 and the operation unit 141 provided on the front door 22 are targets to which the first power supply device 66 supplies operating power. It is good also as the structure contained.

  The first erasing button 61b and the second erasing button 61c are operated when clearing the data of the RWM 154 and the data of the RWM 164 of the payout control device 64 described later.

  In addition to the above, various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 41a to 45b and the open detection switch 39 are connected to the input side of the MPU 152. Each of the various winning detection sensors 41a to 45b is provided in one-to-one correspondence with a winning-corresponding pitch portion such as a general winning port 41, a variable winning device 42, an upper operating port 43, a lower operating port 44, and a through gate 45. A detection sensor is included, and the MPU 152 makes a winning determination for each winning part. Further, the MPU 152 executes various lotteries based on winning in the upper working port 43 and various lotteries based on winning in the lower working port 44.

  A sound emission control device 62 is connected to the output side of the MPU 152. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 62. The sound emission control device 62 controls driving of the various light emitting units 53 and 54 and the speaker device 37 based on the command received from the main control device 61 and transmits the command to the display control device 63. The display control device 63 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 62 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the display of images on the display surface of the symbol display device 46a.

  In addition to the above, on the output side of the MPU 152, a variable winning drive unit 42d that opens and closes the open / close door 42c of the variable winning device 42, and an electric combination drive unit that opens and closes the electric combination 44b of the lower operating port 44. 44c, the special figure display part 47, and the universal figure display part 48 are connected. The main control board 151 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 152 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 152 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit 42d so that the large winning opening 42b of the variable winning device 42 is opened and closed. Further, when the support winning of the electric accessory 44b is won, drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 44c is executed in the MPU 152 so that the electric accessory 44b is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 47 is executed in the MPU 152. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 44b is to be opened is clearly indicated, the display control of the general-purpose display unit 48 is executed in the MPU 152.

  A payout control device 64 is connected to both the input side and the output side of the MPU 152. The payout control device 64 includes a payout control board 161 that controls the use and grant of the game ball B <b> 1 and a second power failure monitoring board 165 that monitors the supply status of power from the second power supply device 67.

  An MPU 162 is mounted on the payout control board 161. The MPU 162 includes a ROM 163 and an RWM 164. The ROM 163 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The ROM 163 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 162 and fixed value data. The RWM 164 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing. The time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 163 when compared with the data capacity. The RWM 164 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 163. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 162 or the payout control board 161 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the MPU 152, ROM 153, and RWM 154 of the main control board 151 from the MPU 162, ROM 163, and RWM 164 of the payout control board 161, the former is referred to as the main MPU 152, the main ROM 153, and the main side. The RWM 154 is referred to, and the latter is referred to as a payout MPU 162, a payout ROM 163, and a payout RWM 164.

  The payout MPU 162 is provided with an input port and an output port. A second power failure monitoring board 165 provided in the payout control device 64 is connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 162.

  The second power failure monitoring board 165 relays between the payout control board 161 and the second power supply device 67, and further monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the second power supply device 67. Then, when the monitoring voltage becomes less than 5 volts, a power failure signal is transmitted to the payout MPU 162 on the assumption that a power failure has occurred in the second power supply device 67.

  The second power supply device 67 is connected to a commercial power source of the game hall, and supplies operating power to electric devices mounted on the pachinko machine 10 other than the game board 33. Specifically, the second power supply device 67 includes a payout control device 64, a launch control device 65, a game ball launch mechanism 34, a ball feed device 86, a launch operation device 36, a launch ball detection sensor 84, a return ball detection sensor 124, Operating power is supplied to the reader device 85, the polishing drive unit 113, the various light emitting units 53 and 54, the speaker device 37, and the operation unit 141. Further, the second power supply device 67 also supplies operating power to the management unit 131 provided on the side of the pachinko machine 10.

  The second power supply 67 can store and hold data in the payout-side RWM 164 and the RWM 174 of the management unit 131 even when supply of operating power from the commercial power supply to the second power supply 67 is stopped. For this purpose, a power supply unit for power interruption (not shown) for supplying backup power to the RWMs 164 and 174 is provided. The power supply unit for power interruption is a rechargeable type such as a capacitor, and charging is performed when operating power is supplied from the commercial power supply to the second power supply device 67. Data is stored and held in the RWMs 164 and 174 for a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days) even during a power outage due to backup power from the power supply unit for power interruption.

  If the first power supply device 66 includes the electric device provided on the front door 22 in addition to the electric device mounted on the game board 33 as a target to which the first power supply device 66 supplies operating power as described above, The various light emitting units 53 and 54 and the operation unit 141 are excluded from the targets to which the power supply device 67 supplies operating power.

  In addition to the above, a firing ball detection sensor 84 and a return ball detection sensor 124 are connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 162. The payout side MPU 162 grasps the presence or absence of a launch ball based on the detection result of the launch ball detection sensor 84 and grasps the presence or absence of a return ball based on the detection result of the return ball detection sensor 124.

  A polishing drive unit 113 is connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 162. While operating power is supplied to the payout side MPU 162, the operating power is supplied to the polishing drive unit 113 at all times.

  In addition to the main control device 61, a launch control device 65, a reader device 85, an operation unit 141, and a management unit 131 are connected to both the input side and the output side of the payout side MPU 162.

  The launch control device 65 is connected to the game ball launch mechanism 34, the ball feed device 86, and the launch operation device 36. In the situation where the touch sensor 36c detects that the operation handle 36b of the firing operation device 36 is touched and the stop switch 36e is not turned on, the launch control device 65 is directed toward the payout MPU 162. Continues transmission of level condition satisfaction signal.

  In the situation where the transmission of the signal is continued, when the game can be launched, the sending-out MPU 162 continues to send the HI-level launch permission signal. In this case, the launch control device 65 executes drive control in the order of the ball feeder 86 → the game ball launch mechanism 34, and supplies one game ball B1 from the ball tray 71 onto the launch rail 81 and the supply thereof. The played game ball B1 is fired toward the game area. The firing strength at this time is determined according to the signal transmitted from the variable resistor 36d of the firing operation device 36, but the minimum firing strength is the launching side of the firing rail 81 where the launched game ball B1 is fired. The strength is set so as to reach a position closer to the game area than the end of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from flowing back on the launch rail 81 even though the launch operation of the game ball B1 is performed. In addition, when the transmission of the HI level launch permission signal is continued, the launch cycle of the game ball B1 is set to be a predetermined cycle, specifically, one game ball B1 in 0.6 sec. Is set to fire.

  In addition, when the launch control device 65 receives the HI level ID registration signal from the payout control device 64 even in a situation where the transmission of the condition establishment signal is not continued, the ball feeding device 86 → game Drive control is executed in the order of the ball launch mechanism 34, and one game ball B 1 is supplied from the ball tray 71 onto the launch rail 81 and the supplied game ball B 1 is directed toward the return ball collection unit 121. Let it fire. The firing strength at this time is uniquely determined regardless of the amount of operation of the operation handle 36b, and is a position closer to the game area than the end on the firing destination side of the firing rail 81 and does not reach the guide rail. The game ball B1 starts dropping and the game ball B1 is set to be collected by the return ball collecting unit 121.

  The reader device 85 is for receiving ID information from the game ball B1 that is supplied on the launch rail 81 and has not yet been launched, and generates a call wave based on receiving a call wave output command from the payout MPU 162. The ID information that is output and received by reading the response wave is transmitted to the payout MPU 162. Details of this will be described later.

  As already described, the operation unit 141 includes a frequency display unit 147, a remaining number display unit 148, and various operation buttons 142 to 146. A signal indicating whether or not the various operation buttons 142 to 146 are operated is transmitted to the payout MPU 162. Further, display control of the frequency display unit 147 and the remaining number display unit 148 is executed based on a signal transmitted from the payout side MPU 162.

  The management unit 131 includes a management control board 171 that performs control for recognizing input cash, control for recognizing the input storage medium M, and control for discharging the storage medium M.

  An MPU 172 is mounted on the management control board 171. The MPU 172 includes a ROM 173 and an RWM 174. The ROM 173 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The ROM 173 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 172 and fixed value data. The RWM 174 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage and retention, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing. The time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 173 when compared with the data capacities. The RWM 174 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 173. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 172 or the management control board 171 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the MPU 172, ROM 173, and RWM 174 of the management control board 171 from those of the main control device 61 and the payout control device 64, the management side MPU 172, the management side ROM 173, and the management side RWM 174 say.

  The management side MPU 172 is provided with an input port and an output port. A banknote circuit 175 is connected to the input side of the management side MPU 172. The cash inserted into the cash slot 132 is identified by the banknote circuit 175, and the identification result is transmitted to the management side MPU 172.

  Various drive units 176a to 176c are provided on the output side of the management side MPU 172. When cash is inserted into the cash slot 132, the driving unit 176a corresponding to the cash slot 132 is driven and controlled, and the cash is taken into the management unit 131. When the storage medium M is inserted into the medium insertion port 133, the drive unit 176b corresponding to the medium insertion port 133 is driven and controlled, and the storage medium M is taken into the management unit 131. When the storage medium M is discharged, the drive unit 176c corresponding to the medium discharge port 134 is driven and controlled, whereby the storage medium M is discharged from the management unit 131.

  In addition to the payout control device 64, a medium circuit 177 is connected to both the input side and the output side of the management side MPU 172. The storage medium M inserted into the medium insertion port 133 is read from the stored information by the medium circuit 177 and the read result is transmitted to the management side MPU 172. When an instruction to eject the storage medium M is given, the medium circuit 177 performs a process of writing information to the storage medium M based on a signal transmitted from the management side MPU 172.

<Process after power recovery and power failure executed by each MPU 152, 162, 172>
Next, a description will be given of processing after power recovery and power failure executed by the MPUs 152, 162, and 172. First, the main process executed by the main MPU 152 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the main RWM 154 is permitted.

  Thereafter, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the first erasure button 61b provided on the main controller 61 is manually operated. In subsequent step S104, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RWM 154. It is determined whether or not. In step S105, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S106, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, whether or not the stored data is valid. Determine whether.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the data of the main RWM 154 is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the game hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the first erase button 61b. Therefore, if the first erase button 61b is pressed, the process proceeds to step S107. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S107. In step S107, the main side RWM 154 is cleared as initialization of the main side RWM 154. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S108.

  In step S108, it is determined whether or not the second erase button 61c provided on the main control device 61 is manually operated. When the pachinko machine 10 initializes not only the main RWM 154 but also the payout RWM 164 and the management RWM 174 when the power is turned on, the power is turned on while pressing both the first erase button 61b and the second erase button 61c. It is thrown. Therefore, if not only the first erase button 61b but the second erase button 61c is pressed, the process proceeds to step S109. In step S109, an initialization command for instructing initialization of the payout side RWM 164 and the management side RWM 174 is output to the payout side MPU 162. On the other hand, if the second erase button 61c has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S110. In step S110, the main MPU 152 outputs a return command to the payout MPU 162 indicating that the processing related to the initialization of the main RWM 154 and other RWMs 164 and 174 has been completed. In this case, even if the main RWM 154 is initialized, the payout RWM 164 and the management RWM 174 are not initialized.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on,
(1) The main RWM 154, the payout RWM 164, and the management RWM 174 are not initialized. (2) The main RWM 154 is initialized, and the payout RWM 164 and the management RWM 174 are not initialized. 3) The manager of the game hall can select one of the initializations for all of the main RWM 154, the payout RWM 164, and the management RWM 174. Further, in this selection, an operation corresponding to the selection may be performed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as will be described later, in the main controller 61, the progress of the game using the special figure display unit 47, the universal figure display unit 48, the variable winning device 42 and the electric winning combination 44b is controlled, and the payout control device 64 and the number of game balls B1 usable in the management unit 131 are controlled. In this case, it is assumed that an internal abnormality occurs regarding the progress of the former game in a situation where no abnormality has occurred regarding the control of the number of usable game balls B1. On the other hand, it is assumed that some sort of fraud is performed and an abnormality occurs in both the progress of the game and the control of the number of usable game balls B1. On the other hand, by making it possible to selectively initialize the RWMs 154, 164, and 174 as described above, it is possible to appropriately cope with each event.

  The payout side RWM 164 and the management side RWM 174 may be initialized, and the main side RWM 154 may be operated without being initialized. For example, such initialization may be performed when the second erase button 61c is operated in a situation where the first erase button 61b is not operated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S106, a power-on setting process is executed in step S111 after executing the process in step S109 or after executing the process in step S110. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RWM 154 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is set in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to. In addition, an interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S112 to S116. That is, the main MPU 152 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as will be described later, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S112 to S116 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S112 to S116 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S112, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RWM 154. The power failure flag is set to “1” when it is confirmed that a power failure signal is received from the first power failure monitoring board 155 in the power failure information storage process (step S401) in the timer interruption process of the main MPU 152 described later. Flag to be

  If “1” is not set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S113. In step S113, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S114, random number initial value update processing for updating a random number initial value counter CINI described later is executed, and in step S115, variation counter updating processing for updating a variation type counter CS described later is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RWM 154, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S116, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted is performed. After performing the process of step S116, it returns to step S112 and repeats the process of step S112-step S116.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S112 that “1” is set in the power failure flag, the power failure occurrence processing in steps S117 to S120 is executed. In the process upon occurrence of a power failure, first, in step S117, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In subsequent step S118, a power failure command is output to the payout MPU 162 in order to recognize that a power failure has occurred in the main MPU 152. Thereafter, the checksum is calculated and stored in step S119, and after prohibiting access to the main RWM 154 in step S120, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  Next, the main process executed by the payout MPU 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S <b> 201, it is determined whether a return command is received from the main MPU 152. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either an initialization command or a return command has been received from the main MPU 152. If a return command has not been received, the process stands by in step S201, and if a return command has been received, the process proceeds to step S202 and subsequent steps.

  The initialization command and the return command set as the return commands are transmitted when the main MPU 152 completes the processing related to the initialization of the main RWM 154 and other RWMs 164 and 174. In addition, the main MPU 152 transmits an initialization command or a return command, and then proceeds to a process after the completion of power recovery. In this case, the payout side MPU 162 waits until a return command is received as described above, so that the main MPU 152 does not complete the processing related to the initialization of the RWMs 154, 164, and 174, but pays out. The side MPU 162 is prevented from shifting to the processing after the completion of power recovery.

  In step S202, access to the payout side RWM 164 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S203, it is determined whether or not an initialization command has been received from the main MPU 152. If the initialization command has been received, the payout side RWM 164 is cleared in step S204. Thereafter, in step S205, an initialization command for instructing initialization of the management-side RWM 174 is output to the management-side MPU 172. On the other hand, if the initialization command has not been received, in step S206, the return side MPU 162 outputs a return command indicating that the processing related to the initialization of the payout side RWM 164 has been completed to the management side MPU 172.

  After executing the process of step S205 or after executing the process of step S206, initial setting of the operation unit 141 and the like is performed in step S207. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S208 to S210. That is, the payout-side MPU 162 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as described later, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S208 to S210 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S208 to S210 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, it is determined whether or not a power failure command is received from the main MPU 152 in step S208, and it is determined whether or not a power failure signal is received from the second power failure monitoring board 165 in step S209. . If a negative determination is made in both step S208 and step S209, in step S210, an interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. After executing the process of step S210, the process returns to step S208, and the processes of step S208 to step S210 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S208 that a power failure command has been received from the main MPU 152, the power failure occurrence processing in steps S213 to S215 is executed. Even if a negative determination is made in step S208, it is determined in step S209 that a power failure signal has been received from the second power failure monitoring board 165, and thereafter, a power failure command is received from the main MPU 152 in step S211. If it is determined that the monitoring time at the time of power failure (for example, 100 msec) has elapsed since the affirmative determination is made in step S209 and the affirmative determination is made in step S212, step S213 to step S213 The process at the time of power failure occurrence of S215 is executed.

  In the process upon occurrence of a power failure, first, in step S213, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S214, a power failure command is output to the management side MPU 172 in order to recognize that a power failure has occurred in the payout side MPU 162. Thereafter, after prohibiting access to the payout side RWM 164 in step S215, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  In a configuration in which a power failure signal is output from the first power failure monitoring board 155 to the main side MPU 152 and a power failure signal is output from the second power failure monitoring board 165 to the payout side MPU 162, the power supply side relay board 69 is provided. When the power switch 69a is turned OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, a power failure signal is output to the main MPU 152 and a power failure signal is output to the payout MPU 162. In this case, even if the main MPU 152 receives a power failure signal in the middle of the timer interrupt process, the main MPU 152 does not immediately execute the power failure process, but performs the power failure process after the completion of the timer interrupt process of the processing time. To do. In this configuration, even if the payout side MPU 162 receives the power failure signal, the payout side MPU 162 waits for the power failure command received from the main side MPU 152 or the elapse of the monitoring time at the time of power failure to execute the power failure process. The monitoring time at the time of the power failure is that the payout side MPU 162 receives a power failure command after the payout side MPU 162 receives a power failure signal when the power switch 69a is turned off or a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply. It is set as a time longer than the maximum expected time until completion. As a result, when a condition for executing the power failure process is satisfied in both the main MPU 152 and the payout MPU 162, the payout MPU 162 can output a command other than the power outage command to the payout MPU 162 from the main MPU 152. Thus, it is possible to prevent the processing during power failure from being executed.

  In the configuration in which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 152 from the first power supply device 66 and operating power is supplied to the payout MPU 162 from the second power supply device 67, only one of the power supply devices is supplied from the commercial power supply. It is assumed that the supply of the operating power is stopped. In this case, when the payout MPU 162 receives a power failure command from the main MPU 152, the payout side MPU 162 executes the power failure process regardless of whether or not a power failure signal is received from the second power failure monitoring board 165. When the control is stopped in the side MPU 152, the control can also be stopped in the payout side MPU 162.

  Further, even when the power failure command is not received from the main MPU 152, when the power failure signal is received from the second power failure monitoring board 165 and the monitoring time at the time of power failure has elapsed, the payout MPU 162 performs the power failure processing. Run. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the commercial power supply is stopped only for the second power supply device 67, control is stopped at the payout side MPU 162 while preventing the data on the payout side RWM 164 from being destroyed. It becomes possible to do.

  Next, the main process executed by the management MPU 172 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether a return command is received from the payout MPU 162. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either an initialization command or a return command is received from the payout side MPU 162. If a return command has not been received, the process stands by in step S301, and if a return command has been received, the process proceeds to step S302 and subsequent steps.

  The initialization command and the return command set as the return commands are transmitted when the payout side MPU 162 completes the processing related to the initialization of the payout side RWM 164. Also, the payout MPU 162 transmits an initialization command or a return command, and then proceeds to a process after completion of power recovery. In this case, the management side MPU 172 waits until the management side MPU 172 receives a return command as described above, so that the management side MPU 172 does not complete the process on the payout side MPU 162 regarding the initialization of the payout side RWM 164. Is prevented from shifting to the process after the completion of power recovery.

  In step S302, access by the management-side RWM 174 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S303, it is determined whether or not an initialization command has been received from the payout MPU 162. If the initialization command has been received, the management-side RWM 174 is cleared in step S304. If a negative determination is made in step S303, or after execution of the processing in step S304, initial setting of the medium circuit 177, bill circuit 175, and various drive units 176a to 176c is performed in step S305.

  Thereafter, normal processing in steps S306 to S308 is performed. In the normal process, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not a power failure command is received from the payout MPU 162. If a power failure command has not been received, the ball supply management process is executed in step S307, the medium supply management process is executed in step S308, and the process returns to step S306. Each of these management processes will be described in detail later.

  If a power failure command is received in step S306, the power failure occurrence processing in step S309 is executed. Specifically, in step S309, access to the management-side RWM 174 is prohibited. After that, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  As described above, the main process is executed in the main MPU 152, the payout MPU 162, and the management MPU 172, so that at the time of power recovery, the main MPU 152 first proceeds to the process after the power recovery is completed, and then the payout MPU 162. Advances to processing after completion of power recovery, and finally the management-side MPU 172 proceeds to processing after completion of power recovery. When the power switch 69a is turned off or a commercial power failure occurs, the main MPU 152 first executes a power failure occurrence process, and then the payout MPU 162 executes a power failure occurrence process. The management-side MPU 172 executes processing when a power failure occurs.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by main MPU 152>
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 152 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU 152. The timer interrupt process is started at a specific cycle on the main side, specifically, at a cycle of 4 msec.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S401. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the first power failure monitoring board 155, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure flag of the main RWM 154 is set to “ 1 ”is set.

  In subsequent step S402, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and an electric accessory release counter C4, which will be described later, are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information Then, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S403, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S114, and in step S404, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S115. In subsequent step S405, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

  Thereafter, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing after step S407 is executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S407, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 42d and 44c is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special winning opening 42b to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 42d is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 44b of the lower working port 44 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 44c is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S408, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In the subsequent step S409, a signal received from each of the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b is read, and a winning detection process for performing a process corresponding to the read information is executed. The details of the winning detection process will be described later in detail. In step S410, timer update processing is executed for updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RWM 154 collectively.

  In subsequent step S411, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is performed, and in step S412, a prize ball command output setting process is performed. . Further, in step S413, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S408, the disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor 41a-45b, the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12, and the front door 22 are confirmed. Confirm opening.

  In the subsequent step S414, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  In the subsequent step S415, the ordinary power control process is executed. In the ordinary power control control process, when winning through the through gate 45 occurs, a process for obtaining numerical information of the electric accessory release counter C4 described later is executed, and the numerical information is stored. If it is, the numerical value information is determined to be released, and further, a process for performing an effect for ordinary drawing is executed in response to the opening determination. Moreover, the process which opens and closes the electrically-driven accessory 44b of the lower working port 44 based on the result of open determination is performed.

  In the subsequent step S416, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 47 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S414 and S415, and the display content of the general map display unit 48 is updated. Set the output information for

  In the subsequent step S417, a demonstration display process is executed for setting the display content of the symbol display device 46a for standby display in a situation where both the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed.

  In subsequent step S418, a ball management state reception process is performed for grasping information on the number of usable game balls B1 based on a command received from the payout MPU 162, and in step S419, in accordance with the ball management state reception process. The remaining sphere handling process is executed. Details of these processes will be described later.

  In subsequent step S420, external information setting processing is executed so as to control the start and end of output of an external signal in accordance with the processing results of various processing executed in the current timer interrupt processing. When an affirmative determination is made in step S406, or after the processing of steps S407 to S420 is executed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Next, the winning detection process executed in step S409 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the winning detection process, a process of confirming the detection results of the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b is executed. In this confirmation, the input port of the main MPU 152 is confirmed. Here, prior to the description of the winning detection process, the configuration of the input port 152a provided in the main MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The input port 152a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7.

  In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 152a, in order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 152a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control. In the winning detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 152a is set to the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b.

  In such a setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 is information corresponding to the winning signal from the upper working opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the lower operating port detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the first winning port detection sensor 41a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the second winning mouth detection sensor 41b, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the third winning mouth detection sensor 41c. The 6 bits D6 store information corresponding to the winning signal from the first gate detection sensor 45a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the second gate detection sensor 45b. There are stored.

  In this case, when each of the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b has not detected the passing of the game ball, the winning detection sensor 41a to 45b outputs a HI level signal indicating that the winning ball is not detected and detects the passing of the gaming ball. If it is, a LOW level signal indicating that it is being detected is output as a winning signal. However, the main control board 151 is provided with an inverting circuit, and the state of the signal is inverted before the detection signals are input to the input port 152a. When the LOW level signal is received through the inverting circuit, the input port 152a stores "0" information (data 0 or none information) in the corresponding bit, and receives the HI level signal through the inverting circuit. If it is, information “1” (data 1 or presence information) is stored in the corresponding bit.

  That is, in a situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected by the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b, information of “0” corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is detected. In such a situation, “1” information corresponding to information indicating that detection is in progress is stored in the corresponding bit.

  Each winning detection sensor 41a to 45b outputs a LOW level signal as a winning signal while not detecting the passing of a game ball, and outputs an HI level signal as a winning signal while detecting the passing of a gaming ball. It is good also as a structure to output. In this case, the inverting circuit may be omitted.

  In the winning detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16A, first, in step S501, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is stored in the register of the main MPU 152. A process of shifting to the first winning determination area WA1 is executed. The first winning determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 16 (b-1), and stores all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. It is possible data capacity. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the first winning determination area WA1 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence, for example, the 0th bit D0. Is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first winning determination area WA1.

  In the subsequent step S502, a wait process for winning detection is executed. In this wait process, the main MPU 152 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time elapses. In this pachinko machine 10, 10 μsec is set as the wait time, but it does not disturb the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process, and the effects described below are sufficiently exerted by setting the wait process. However, the specific wait time is arbitrary, but it is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

  Incidentally, as already explained, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the process of one step. Therefore, even if the process of step S502 is not set, a forcible wait time of 1.2 μsec occurs between steps S501 and S503. In this regard, in step S502, not only the minimum time required for executing the process but also an additional wait time is set between the process of step S501 and the process of step S503.

  In subsequent step S503, a process of shifting the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 to the second winning determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 152 is executed. Incidentally, since the information update at the input port 152a is performed at an interval shorter than the time from the completion of step S501 to the start of step S503, the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 in step S503. The information to be transferred from can be different from that in step S501.

  Similarly to the first winning determination area WA1, the second winning determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 16 (b-2), and is stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. The data capacity is sufficient to store all of the stored information. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the second winning determination area WA2 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence, and the storage source bits are further determined. And the storage destination bit are the same as in the first winning determination area WA1.

  Thereafter, in step S504, after the winning determination process is executed, the main winning detection process is terminated. The winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the winning determination process, first, in step S601, 8 is set in a winning determination counter provided in the main RWM 154. In subsequent step S602, each bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current winning determination counter in the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit in the input port 152a.

  In subsequent step S603, AND processing of each information grasped in step S602 is executed, and the AND processing result is stored in a register. In step S604, the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are stored. Among them, the AND processing result is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side on which the information on the result of the AND processing is stored in the winning detection processing in the processing time of the previous timer interrupt processing. The first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIGS. 16 (b-3) and 16 (b-4), and each of the first winning determination areas WA1. The data capacity is capable of storing all the information of the AND processing result of each bit and each bit of the second winning determination area WA2. In this case, the order of bits in the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 subjected to AND processing and the order of each bit in the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 are unambiguous. Is stipulated.

  After that, in step S605, information on the result of AND processing in the winning determination processing in the processing time of the previous timer interrupt processing in the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 is stored. Then, the bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current winning determination counter is read. In step S606, an inversion process for inverting the read information between “0” and “1” is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S607, AND processing of the AND processing result information in step S603 and the inversion processing result information in step S606 is executed. In subsequent step S608, the AND processing result is used as winning detection start information. It is determined whether or not the corresponding value is “1”. If it is determined in step S608 that the AND processing result is “1”, the process proceeds to step S609 and subsequent steps.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the current winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to one of the upper operation port 43 and the lower operation port 44. If it corresponds to either the upper working port 43 or the lower working port 44, in step S610, the operation winning flag provided in the main side RWM 154 is set to “1”, and in step S611, the main winning flag is set. 1 is added to the numerical information of the three prize ball counters provided in the side RWM 154.

  The operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 152 that processing corresponding to winning in the upper operating port 43 or the lower operating port 44 is to be executed, other than execution of the winning ball. It is. Incidentally, since the winning detection sensors 43a and 44a are provided in the upper operating port 43 and the lower operating port 44, respectively, winning in the upper operating port 43 and winning in the lower operating port 44 is one of timer interruption processing. It may be grasped simultaneously within the range of processing times. Therefore, in order to cope with this, the operation winning flag is provided corresponding to the number of the operation ports 43 and 44, and specifically, two operation winning flags are provided. The three prize ball counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 152 the number of times to output the three prize ball commands instructing the execution of the three prize balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S609, it is determined in step S612 whether or not the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the variable winning device 42. If it corresponds to the variable winning device 42, “1” is set to the large winning flag provided in the main RWM 154 in step S 613, and 15 pieces provided in the main RWM 154 in step S 614. 1 is added to the numerical information of the prize ball counter.

  The big winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 152 that processing corresponding to winning in the variable winning device 42 is in a state in which processing other than execution of the winning ball is to be executed. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 152 to specify the number of times to output 15 prize ball commands instructing execution of 15 prize balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S612, it is determined in step S615 whether the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the through gate 45. If it corresponds to the through gate 45, “1” is set to the through flag provided in the main RWM 154 in step S616. If a negative determination is made in step S615, it means that the current winning is corresponding to the general winning opening 41, so in step S617, the value of the ten prize ball counters provided in the main RWM 154 is obtained. Add 1 to the information.

  The through flag is a flag for the main MPU 152 to specify that the process corresponding to winning through the through gate 45 is to be executed. The 10-award ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 152 to specify the number of times to output a 10-award ball command instructing execution of 10 award balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S608, or after any one of steps S611, S614, S616, and S617 is executed, the process proceeds to step S618. In step S618, the winning determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S619, it is determined whether or not the winning determination counter is “0”.

  If it is not “0”, the processing from step S602 to step S617 is executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the winning determination counter updated in step S618. When the processes in steps S602 to S617 are executed for the numerical information set in step S601, an affirmative determination is made in step S619, and the main winning determination process ends.

  Next, by performing the winning detection process (FIG. 16), whether or not there is a winning in the general winning port 41, the variable winning device 42, the upper operating port 43, the lower operating port 44 and the through gate 45 in the game area. The manner of detection will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, timing for monitoring detection results (hereinafter also referred to as winning information) in the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a timing chart for explaining the timing for monitoring each winning information.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, in the configuration in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is activated at a cycle of T1 (specifically, 4 msec), the process for monitoring the winning information is 2 times in each process of the timer interrupt process. Times (step S501, step S503). The process of monitoring each set of winning information is executed so that the timing is changed, but the process of monitoring the winning information on the preceding side (step S501) is time T2 with respect to the timing when the timer interrupt process is started. It is executed at the timing when.

  In this case, the timing at which the winning detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed before the process whose processing time is likely to fluctuate, such as the special figure special electric control process and the ordinary figure ordinary electric control process. The processing executed prior to the detection processing is processing in which the processing time is relatively difficult to fluctuate. Therefore, the period until the process for monitoring the winning information on the preceding side is started in the timer interrupt process for each processing time is the same, substantially the same or similar at T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of winning information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the winning information on the preceding side is periodically executed.

  Among the processes for monitoring each set of winning information, between the process for monitoring the winning information on the front side (step S501) and the process for monitoring the winning information on the rear side (step S503) The wait process (step S502) is executed, but in this wait process, no processing is executed and only a wait is made until a certain wait time T3 elapses. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of winning information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the winning information on the rear side is periodically executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18B, the contents of the calculation executed when the winning determination is performed will be described. FIG. 18B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the calculation executed when winning determination is performed. Actually, various operations are performed in units of 1 bit, but in the following description, the contents of the operations will be described in units of 1 byte. However, a configuration in which an operation in units of 1 byte as described below is actually performed may be employed.

  In the case of FIG. 18B, first, in the process of monitoring the first-side winning information in the n-th timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 18B1, “00100000” is displayed in the first winning determination area WA1. It is set. In this case, among the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b, the winning information of the third winning opening detection sensor 41c is information indicating that the game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as winning information), and other sensors. The winning information is information indicating that no game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as no winning information).

  In the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the n-th timer interrupt process, “10100000” is set in the second winning determination area WA2, as shown in FIG. 18 (B2). In this case, among the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b, each of the second gate detection sensor 45b and the third winning opening detection sensor 41c is winning information, and the other sensors are winning information.

  When the information of the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “00100000” as shown in FIG. 18 (B3). This is set in the first post-computation area WA3 as a monitoring result of the winning information in the timer interruption processing of the n-th processing time. If the winning information monitoring result is set in the first post-computation area WA3 in the (n-1) th timer interrupt processing, the winning information monitoring result in the nth timer interrupt processing is the second post-computation area. Set to WA4. Also, the winning determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the winning information at the (n-1) th time and the monitoring result of the winning information at the nth time, but the contents of the calculation of this process are omitted here.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18 (B4), “10100110” is set in the first winning determination area WA1 in the process of monitoring the winning information on the preceding side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process. In this case, among the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b, each of the second gate detecting sensor 45b, the third winning port detecting sensor 41c, the lower operating port detecting sensor 44a, and the upper operating port detecting sensor 43a is the winning information. Other sensors have no winning information.

  In the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, “10110000” is set in the second winning determination area WA2, as shown in FIG. 18 (B5). In this case, among the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b, each of the second gate detecting sensor 45b, the third winning port detecting sensor 41c, and the upper operating port detecting sensor 43a is information indicating that there is a winning, and the other sensors are not winning. It is information.

  When the information of the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “1010001” as shown in FIG. 18 (B6), and the information is This is set in the second post-computation area WA4 as a result of monitoring the winning information in the timer interruption process of the (n + 1) th processing.

  Thereafter, in the winning determination process (FIG. 17) in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, first, the monitoring result of the winning information in the nth timer interruption process is read out from the first post-computation area WA3 and the read out monitoring. Inversion processing is performed on the resulting information. Then, as shown in FIG. 18 (B7), “11011111” is obtained. Then, the result of the inversion process is ANDed with the monitoring result of the winning information in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process. This results in “10000010” as shown in FIG. 18 (B8). In this case, in the winning determination process, it is determined that the winning of the game ball is detected by the second gate detection sensor 45b, and it is determined that the winning of the game ball is detected by the upper working port detection sensor 43a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18 (B4), the lower working port detection sensor 44a is the winning presence information in the process of monitoring the winning information on the front side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process. This is caused by noise. In this case, even if it is confirmed that there is a change from information with no winning information to information with winning information, it is not immediately determined that winning has occurred, but when winning information is confirmed multiple times, it is determined that winning has occurred. It is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18 (B5), in the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process, the lower working port detection sensor 44a is no-winning information, and electrical noise is generated. Are not treated as winning game balls.

  In the third prize opening detection sensor 41c, there is a winning information in each of the process of monitoring a set of winning information in the n-th timer interrupt process and the process of monitoring a set of winning information in the n + 1-th timer interrupt process. However, this indicates a state in which a game ball in which the occurrence of a winning is already detected is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of the winning is specified on the condition that the monitoring result of the winning information in the n-th timer interrupt processing is “0”, the winning of one game ball is treated as a plurality of winnings. I will not.

  When the winning detection processing is executed as described above, the detection results of the winning detection sensors 41a to 45b are monitored, and when a winning corresponding to the provision of the game ball B1 occurs. Depending on the winning location, an addition process to the 3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter and 15 prize ball counter is executed. If any one of these counters is “1” or more, the prize ball command is set in the prize ball command output setting process (step S412) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). The awarded ball command is transmitted to the payout MPU 162. In this case, the output setting of the prize ball command is performed only once in one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is “2” or more, the 15 prize ball commands are transmitted only once in one process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined plurality (for example, two or three) of prize ball commands may be transmitted in one processing time.

  In addition, there may be a case where each of the three prize ball counters, the ten prize ball counters, and the 15 prize ball counters is “1” or more. In this case, an output of a prize ball command with a large number of prize balls is output. have priority. That is, the output of 15 prize ball commands has priority over the output of 10 prize ball commands and the output of 3 prize ball commands, and the output of 10 prize ball commands has priority over the output of 3 prize ball commands. .

  When the 15 prize ball counter is set to “1” or more and the 15 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 15 prize ball counter. Further, when the 10 prize ball counter is set to “1” or more and the 10 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 10 prize ball counter. When the three prize ball counter is set to “1” or more and the three prize ball command is set as an output target, the three prize ball counter is decremented by one.

  Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S414 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  Prior to the description of the special figure special electric control process, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main MPU 152 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, special display display unit 47 display setting, symbol display device 46a symbol display setting, general symbol display unit 48 display setting, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 46a are changed. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the display duration in the special figure display unit 47 and the symbol display device 46a are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 44b of the lower operation port 44 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 154a of the main RWM 154.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding storage area 154b when a winning to the upper working port 43 or the lower working port 44 occurs.

  The holding storage area 154b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 43 or the lower operating port 44. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the upper operation port 43 or the lower operation port 44 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 43 or the lower operating port 44 are stored and stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 47. At the start of one game round Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each counter will be described in detail.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 154b at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 43 or the lower operation port 44.

  The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a success / failure table in the success / failure table storage area of the main ROM 153. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 154b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 43 or the lower operation port 44.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 42 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after completion of the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) lower after completion of the opening / closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 44b of the operating port 44.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable prize winning device 42 in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable prize winning device 42 between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  Here, the round game is continued until either one of a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the big winning opening 42b is satisfied. It is a game to play. In addition, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  Further, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the variable winning device 42 are set with different opening durations from when the big winning opening 42b is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long-time mode set to 29 sec, which is a long open duration, and a short-time mode set to 0.8 sec, which is a short duration shorter than the above long time, are set. Has been.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 36 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 34 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. The In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is shorter than the product of the launching period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, the opening duration that is about the same as or slightly longer than the launching period of the game balls. Is set. Accordingly, when the variable winning device 42 is opened once in a long-time manner, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game will be generated at the large winning opening 42b. When the variable winning device 42 is opened once in this mode, it is expected that no winning is made to the big winning opening 42b or even if a winning is generated.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 42b is opened once in each round game in a long-time manner. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 42b is opened once in each round game in a short time mode.

  The number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 42b in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one open, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value as long as the occurrence frequency of winning to the variable winning device 42 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode is started and ended. It is.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 44b of the lower working port 44, the electric combination 44b of the lower working port 44 has a unit time when compared in a situation where game balls are continuously launched in the game area. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric utility item 44b is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 44b occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as a minimum secured time after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the lower operation port 44 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the upper operating port 43 is higher than the lower operating port 44, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 44 is connected to the lower operating port 44. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operation port 44, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so that in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. In addition, a secured time (for example, in the general map display unit 48 based on a winning to the through gate 45) secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, Apply one of the conditions or any combination of conditions to shorten the average time of the reserved time and increase the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area of the main ROM 153 as a distribution table. And as such a distribution destination, a low probability big hit result, a low winning high probability big hit result, and the most advantageous big hit result are set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery results in a jackpot result and shifts to the jackpot state by that.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery results in a jackpot result and shifts to the jackpot state by that.

  Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-described game states refers to a state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, not the open / close execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the low prize-winning high probability hit result is not set as a game result.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the low winning high probability big hit result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

  As a kind of high-accuracy big hit result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. An implicit low winning high probability jackpot result (a game result corresponding to an implicit high probability or a result of a latent probability changing state) may be included. In this case, the jackpot result can be further diversified.

  Furthermore, as a kind of losing result in the winning / losing lottery, there may be included a special losing result that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that does not shift to the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode after the completion. . In the configuration in which both the above-mentioned non-explicit low winning high probability winning result and the special outlier result are set, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is changed to the previous mode. It is common to be maintained in the mode, but the transition mode of the winning / failing lottery mode is different, so that, for example, in the normal gaming state, one of the unclear low winning high probability winning result or the special outage result When it occurs, it is possible to make the player predict which result it actually corresponds to.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 154b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 43 or the lower operation port 44.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 46a. The reach display is provided with a symbol display device 46a capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in the game times in which the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 42 is the high-frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is specially displayed. In the resulting gaming machine, the player is assumed to be in a variable display state that is likely to become the special display result before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 46a is started. The display state for this purpose.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is obtained by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 46a. A display state is displayed in which combinations of reach symbols that may be established are displayed, and in that state, symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode. In game times that do not enter the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 153 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. It is executed when That is, the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to execute reach display. However, in determining the type of reach display, the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 is not used.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 152 determines the variation display time in the special symbol display unit 47 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 46a. The variation type counter CS is updated in each of the main processing and timer interrupt processing described later, and the variation type is determined when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 47 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 46a. The value of the counter CS is acquired. When determining the variable display time, a variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the main ROM 153 is referred to.

  Here, when it is determined to generate a reach display based on the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3, or because it is a game time to shift to an opening / closing execution mode that is a high-frequency winning mode. When it is determined to generate a display, the type of reach display is determined using numerical information acquired from the variation type counter CS. Each reach display differs in the type of character appearing in the reach display, the period during which the reach display is executed, and the like.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in an electric accessory reservation area 154c provided in the main RWM 154 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 45. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 44b is controlled to be in an open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when a winning to the upper working port 43 or the lower working port 44 occurs, a process for obtaining the holding information is executed, and when the holding information is stored, the holding is performed. A determination is made as to whether or not the information is correct, and further, a process for performing an effect for game times is executed using the determination as to whether or not the information is correct. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S701, a hold information acquisition process is executed. In the holding information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a prize is generated in the upper working port 43 or the lower working port 44. If a winning is generated, the number of holds in the holding storage area 154b is an upper limit value ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is less than “4”). When the number of holds is less than the upper limit value, the number of holds is incremented by 1 and the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S402 is used for holding. Stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE.

  In addition, when the winning to the upper working port 43 and the lower working port 44 occurs at the same time, the process for obtaining the hold information is performed a plurality of times within the range of executing the hold information obtaining process once. Run.

  After the hold information acquisition process is executed in step S701, the process proceeds to step S702. In step S702, a confirmation process for holding notice is executed. Details of the confirmation process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S703, a process for reading the information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RWM 154 is executed, and in the step S704, a process for reading the special figure special electric address table from the main ROM 153 is executed. In step S705, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter from the special figure special electric address table is executed.

  Here, the processing content of step S703-step S705 is demonstrated.

  As already described, the special figure special power control process includes a process related to a game-playing effect and a process related to an opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as processing related to the effect for game times, special figure variation start processing (step S707) which is processing for starting the effect for game times and processing for proceeding the effect for game times. A special figure changing process (step S708) and a special figure finalizing process (step S709) that is a process for ending the effect for the game round are set.

  In addition, as processing related to the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity starting process (step S710) which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode and a special electricity which is a process for controlling the open state of the special winning opening 42b. Opening process (step S711), special electric power closing process (step S712) that is a process for controlling the closed state of the special winning opening 42b, opening / closing execution mode ending and gaming state at the end of the opening / closing execution mode Special electric power termination processing (step S713), which is processing for controlling the transition of, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main side MPU 152 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change start process (step S707), and the start address SA1 is the program for executing the special figure change process (step S708). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process (step S709), and the start address SA3 is the program address for executing the special electricity start process (step S710). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power open process (step S711), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special power close process (step S712). This is the start address, and the start address SA6 A start address of a program for executing (step S713).

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the processing executed in the processing, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared (initialized). Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed.

  After executing the process of step S705, in step S706, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S705 is executed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S707.

  In the special figure variation start process, on the condition that the hold information is stored and stored, the process for shifting the hold information to the execution area AE of the hold storage area 154b is executed, and the data of each of the hold areas RE1 to RE4 is also transferred. A process of shifting to the upper side (that is, the first reservation area RE1 side) is executed. After that, with respect to the hold information shifted to the execution area AE, whether or not to determine whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot winning, and if it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the hold information corresponds to any jackpot result A distribution determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is in progress. In the determination process, whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information is numerical information corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined. In the distribution determination process, it is determined whether the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 in the hold information corresponds to which jackpot result category.

  In addition to the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, when the hold information does not correspond to the big win, the reach determination process is performed to determine whether or not the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of reach. Then, the duration selection process for selecting the duration of the game times is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In the reach determination process, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information corresponds to the numerical information on the occurrence of reach.

  When the duration information is selected, the change command including the duration information and the type command including the game result information are transmitted to the voice light emission control device 62 and the pattern display unit 47 displays the pattern. Start the variable display. As a result, one game round is started, and an effect for the game round is started on the special figure display unit 47 and the symbol display device 46a.

  By the way, when the effect for the game round is started in this way, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure variation start process. Update to the one corresponding to the changing process.

  If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure changing process of step S708. In the special figure changing process, a process for determining whether or not it is during the game time duration and before the fixed display is performed. A process for regularly changing the aspect is executed.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until it is the timing to display the fixed figure, if it is not the timing to make a fixed display, the process for changing the regular figure is executed and then the special figure is changing. The process ends. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the timing for final display is reached. In addition, when it is time to confirm and display, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure in-flight process from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process Update to what you did.

  If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S709. In the special figure determination process, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 62 in order to cause the symbol display device 46a to display the stop result of the current game round as a final stop display. The display mode is a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. In the special figure confirmation process, it is determined whether or not the period during confirmation display has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. When the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the mode transition process is executed.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure determination process until the fixed display period elapses, this special figure determination process is terminated if the period has not elapsed. Therefore, after the fixed display is started, the special figure determination process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the period during the fixed display elapses. In addition, when the period during the fixed display has elapsed, in a situation where the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is initialized (that is, “0” is cleared) and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed. In such a situation, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination process to the one corresponding to the special electric power start process.

  If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S710. In the special electricity start process, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 62. In the special electricity start process, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. When the opening period has not elapsed, this special power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special power start process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power start process to the one corresponding to the special power open process. .

  If the acquired start address is SA4, the process jumps to the special power release releasing process in step S711. In the special electric release opening process, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. When the end condition is not satisfied, the process is not waited for in the special electricity release process, but the process for monitoring the establishment of the end condition is executed, and then the special electricity release process is terminated. When the above termination condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric power open process to the one corresponding to the special electric power closed process. Update.

  If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special electricity closing process in step S712. In the special electricity closing process, a process of ending one round game is executed. Further, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. When the interval period has not elapsed, this special electric power closing process is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power closing process. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special power closing process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period elapses. In addition, when the interval period has elapsed, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric current closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric current opening process. To do.

  On the other hand, in the special power shut-off process for the last round game, after executing the process of ending one round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special power shut-off process. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special electricity termination processing.

  If the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to the special power end process in step S713. In the special electric power end process, an ending command indicating that the open / close execution mode is ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 62. In the special electric power end process, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not elapsed, the special electric power end processing is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power end processing. Therefore, after the ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power end process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the ending period elapses. In addition, when the ending period has elapsed, after executing processing for setting the gaming state (open / close lottery mode and support mode) after the opening / closing execution mode, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is initialized. The numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power end process to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

<Processing for Managing Game Ball B1 Executed by Dispensing MPU 162 and Management MPU 172>
Next, a process for managing the game ball B1 executed by the payout side MPU 162 and the management side MPU 172 will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the payout side MPU 162. The timer interrupt process is started at a specific period on the payout side, specifically at a period of 4 msec.

  In the timer interruption process, first, in step S801, a game ball management process for managing the rental of the game ball B1 and the use of the game ball B1 is executed, and in the subsequent step S802, the launch of the game ball B1 is managed. In step S803, the return management process for managing the return of the game value (that is, the storage medium M) is executed, and in step S804, the ID information is registered. ID registration processing is executed, and in the subsequent step S805, ID monitoring processing for executing ID information monitoring is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Hereinafter, each process of step S801 to step S805 will be described in detail.

<Game Ball Management Processing>
First, the game ball management process executed in step S801 will be described. Prior to the description of the game ball management process, the ball supply management process executed by the management MPU 172 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process for supplying balls is executed in step S307 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the management-side MPU 172.

  First, in step S901, based on a signal from the banknote circuit 175, it is determined whether or not a banknote has been inserted into the cash slot 132 of the management unit 131. If a bill has been inserted, bill discrimination processing is executed in step S902. In the banknote circuit 175, the size of the inserted banknote can be identified. When a 10,000 yen bill is inserted, a corresponding banknote insertion signal is output and a 5,000 yen bill is inserted. Outputs a bill insertion signal corresponding to it, outputs a bill insertion signal corresponding to the insertion of a 2000 yen bill, and outputs a corresponding bill insertion signal when a 1000 yen bill is inserted. Is output. In the discrimination processing in step S902, it is discriminated which type of bill insertion signal is received from the bill circuit 175.

  In subsequent step S903, the frequency information corresponding to the determination result in step S902 is grasped by referring to the frequency reference table stored in advance in the management-side ROM 173. Specifically, if it is a 10,000 yen bill, the frequency information is “100”, and if it is a 5000 yen bill, the frequency information is “50”, and it is 2,000 yen. When it is a bill, it is grasped that the frequency information is “20”, and when it is a 1,000 yen bill, it is grasped that the frequency information is “10”.

  Thereafter, in step S904, the frequency information output setting corresponding to the result obtained in step S903 is executed. Specifically, the ball supply command including the frequency information grasped in step S903 is output to the payout MPU 162.

  When a negative determination is made in step S901 or after the processing of step S904 is executed, the storage medium M is inserted into the medium insertion port 133 of the management unit 131 based on the signal from the medium circuit 177 in step S905. It is determined whether or not. The storage medium M is configured so that the frequency information and the remaining sphere information can be stored individually and can be stored simultaneously. The remaining ball information is information indicating the number of game balls B1 that can be used by the player. The medium circuit 177 is configured to be able to individually read the frequency information and the remaining sphere information stored in the storage medium M and recognize each of them.

  If the storage medium M is loaded, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the frequency information is written in the storage medium M based on the signal from the medium circuit 177. If the frequency information has been written, the frequency information is read in step S907, and the output setting of the read frequency information is executed in step S908. Specifically, the ball supply command including the frequency information read in step S907 is output to the payout MPU 162.

  If a negative determination is made in step S906 or after the processing in step S908 is executed, it is determined in step S909 whether or not the remaining sphere information is written in the storage medium M based on the signal from the medium circuit 177. judge. If the remaining sphere information is written, the remaining sphere information is read in step S910, and the output setting of the read remaining sphere information is executed in step S911. Specifically, the ball supply command including the remaining ball information read in step S910 is output to the payout MPU 162. When a negative determination is made in step S909 or after the process of step S911 is executed, the management process for supplying the main ball is ended.

  Even when both the frequency information and the remaining sphere information are stored in the input storage medium M, the sphere supply command corresponding to the frequency information and the sphere supply command corresponding to the remaining sphere information are individually provided. Sent to.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a game ball management process executed by the payout side MPU 162. In the following description, display contents of the frequency display unit 147 and the remaining number display unit 148 of the operation unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 24A to 24C are front views of the operation unit 141. FIG.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether a ball supply command is received from the management side MPU 172 or not. The ball supply commands transmitted from the management side MPU 172 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer of the payout side RWM 164, and the ball supply commands stored in the ring buffer are sequentially read each time the game ball management process is activated. Therefore, in step S1001, it is determined whether an unprocessed ball supply command is stored in the ring buffer.

  If a ball supply command has been received, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not frequency information is included in the ball supply command. If the frequency information is included, in step S1003, the frequency information included in the ball supply command received this time is added to the frequency information storage area 164a provided in the payout side RWM 164. 164a is updated. In the subsequent step S1004, the display of the frequency display unit 147 is updated so that the frequency information in the frequency information storage area 164a after the update in step S1003 is displayed on the frequency display unit 147 of the operation unit 141. For example, as shown in FIG. 24A, “50” is displayed on the frequency display unit 147 in a situation where “0” is displayed on the remaining number display unit 148.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it means that the current sphere supply command includes remaining sphere information instead of frequency information. In this case, in step S1005, the storage area 164b is updated so that the remaining sphere information storage area 164b provided in the payout side RWM 164 is added with the remaining sphere information included in the currently received sphere supply command. In the following step S1006, the display of the remaining number display unit 148 is updated so that the remaining ball information in the remaining ball information storage area 164b after the update in step S1005 is displayed on the remaining number display unit 148 of the operation unit 141. For example, as shown in FIG. 24B, “5375” is displayed on the remaining number display portion 148 in a situation where “0” is displayed on the frequency display portion 147. Further, for example, when the storage medium M in which both the frequency information and the remaining sphere information are written is inserted into the medium insertion port 133 of the management unit 131, as shown in FIG. “25” is displayed at the same time, and “7243” is displayed at the remaining number display portion 148.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, if the process in step S1004 is executed, or if the process in step S1006 is executed, the process proceeds to the ball supply process in steps S1007 to S1011.

  In the ball supply process, first, in step S1007, it is determined whether or not the ball supply button 142 of the operation unit 141 is operated. If the ball supply button 142 is operated, a storage update process for subtraction of frequency information is executed in step S1008. Specifically, the storage area 164a is updated so that a predetermined number of pieces of frequency information (specifically “5”) is subtracted from the frequency information stored in the frequency information storage area 164a. In subsequent step S1009, the display of the frequency display unit 147 is updated so that the frequency information in the frequency information storage area 164a after the update in step S1008 is displayed on the frequency display unit 147.

  In the subsequent step S1010, a storage update process for adding the remaining sphere information is executed. Specifically, the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b is added with the corresponding number of remaining sphere information (specifically “125”) corresponding to the predetermined number of frequency information. Thus, the storage area 164b is updated. In the subsequent step S1011, the display of the remaining number display unit 148 is updated so that the remaining sphere information in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b after the update in step S1010 is displayed on the remaining number display unit 148.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1007 or if the process of step S1011 is executed, the process proceeds to a prize ball handling process in steps S1012 to S1015.

  In the prize ball handling process, first, in step S1012, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command is received from the main MPU 152. The prize ball commands transmitted from the main MPU 152 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer of the payout RWM 164, and the prize ball commands stored in the ring buffer are sequentially read each time the game ball management process is activated. Therefore, in step S1012, it is determined whether an unprocessed prize ball command is stored in the ring buffer.

  If a prize ball command has been received, the number of prize balls is ascertained in step S1013. In the grasping process, information on the number of prize balls included in the prize ball command received this time is grasped. In the present pachinko machine 10, the prize ball command transmitted from the main MPU 152 is one of the three prize ball commands, the ten prize ball commands, and the fifteen prize ball commands. The number of balls is either 3, 10, or 15.

  In the subsequent step S1014, a storage update process for adding the remaining sphere information is executed. Specifically, the storage area 164b is updated so that the remaining ball information corresponding to the number of prize balls is added to the remaining ball information stored in the remaining ball information storage area 164b. In the subsequent step S1015, the display of the remaining number display unit 148 is updated so that the remaining sphere information in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b after the update in step S1014 is displayed on the remaining number display unit 148.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1012, or if the process of step S1015 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1016, where a management process for using game balls is executed, and in step S1017, the frequency information and remaining ball information are output. After executing the process, the present game ball management process is terminated. The management process of game ball use in step S1016 will be described later. In step S1017, the frequency information stored in the frequency information storage area 164a of the payout RWM 164 and the remaining ball information stored in the remaining ball information storage area 164b of the payout RWM 164 are stored in the main MPU 152 as a ball management command. Output.

<Launch management processing>
Next, the launch management process executed in step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether or not it is in the ID registration execution state by determining whether or not “1” is set in the ID registration execution flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. The ID registration execution state is a state in which ID information is read from each of a large number of game balls B1 circulating in the pachinko machine 10 and registered. Details of the ID registration execution state will be described later. If it is in the ID registration execution state, this launch management process is terminated as it is, and if it is not in the ID registration execution state, the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the front door 22 is being opened. As described above, the opening detection switch 39 that detects whether or not the front door 22 is open is electrically connected to the main MPU 152, and the main MPU 152 indicates the detection result of the opening detection switch 39 as the payout MPU 162. Send to. The payout side MPU 162 determines whether or not the front door 22 is being opened based on the transmitted detection result.

  In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level. As described above, the condition satisfaction signal is a signal output from the firing control device 65 toward the payout side MPU 162, and the touch sensor 36c detects that the operation handle 36b of the firing operation device 36 is touched. In the situation where the stop switch 36e is not ON, the transmission of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is continued. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b of the payout side RWM 164 is 1 or more.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102 and an affirmative determination is made in steps S1103 and S1104, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the HI level in step S1105. The launch permission signal is a signal output from the payout side MPU 162 toward the launch control device 65, and the payout side MPU 162 continues to transmit the launch permission signal at the HI level when the above condition is satisfied. When the launch control device 65 receives an HI level launch permission signal from the payout MPU 162, the launch control device 65 uses the ball feeder 86 and the game ball launch mechanism 34 to launch the game ball B1. After executing the process of step S1105, the present launch management process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, a negative determination is made in step S1103, or a negative determination is made in step S1104, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level in step S1106. To do. Thereby, the launch of the game ball B1 is stopped. After executing the process of step S1106, the main fire management process is terminated.

  Here, in the situation where the front door 22 is open as described above, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level, so that when the front door 22 is open, the game ball B1 Launch is prohibited. This prevents the game ball B1 from being fired even though the front door 22 is open. For example, when the front door 22 is opened for maintenance of a game area or the like, the game ball B1 is Outflow from the pachinko machine 10 is prevented.

  Next, the firing control process executed by the firing control device 65 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the launch control process is periodically started at a cycle of 2 msec.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the launch permission signal output from the payout side MPU 162 is at the HI level. If the firing permission signal is at the HI level, 1 is added to the value of the first firing period counter provided in the firing control device 65 in step S1202, and if the firing permission signal is at the LOW level, step S1202 is performed. In S1203, the value of the first firing period counter is cleared to “0”. The first firing cycle counter is a firing cycle of the game ball B1 in a situation where the game ball B1 is to be launched using the ball feeder 86 and the game ball launch mechanism 34 based on the operation of the launch operation device 36. Is a counter that is used to set a predetermined value.

  When the process of step S1202 is executed or when the process of step S1203 is executed, it is determined in step S1204 whether the first ball has been fed. In the state where the first ball has been fed, in the situation where the game ball B1 is to be launched based on the operation of the launch operation device 36, the supply of one game ball B1 onto the launch rail 81 by the ball feed device 86 has already been completed. It is a state of being.

  If the first ball has not been fed, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the value of the first firing period counter is “300”. As described above, the first firing period counter is incremented by 1 each time the launch control process is started in a state where the launch permission signal is at the HI level. Further, the launch control process is started every 2 msec. Therefore, the value of the first firing period counter is “300” means that the output state of the HI level continues after the firing permission signal becomes HI level, or one game This means that 0.6 sec has elapsed in a state where the output state of the HI level launch permission signal has continued since the launch of the ball B1.

  When the value of the first firing period counter is “300”, the process proceeds to step S1206 to step S1208. In step S1206, the value of the first firing cycle counter is cleared to “0”. In step S1207, a driving signal for ball feeding is output to the ball feeding device 86. In step S1208, the first ball feeding completed state is set. Set. When the ball feed driving signal is output, the ball feed device 86 supplies one game ball B1 from the ball tray portion 71 onto the launch rail 81.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, 1 is added to the value of the first post-ball feed counter provided in the firing control device 65 in step S1209. Based on the operation of the launch operation device 36, the first post-ball feed counter drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 34 after one game ball B1 is supplied onto the launch rail 81 by the ball feed device 86. This is a counter for specifying in the firing control device 65 the timing for firing the sphere B1.

  In a succeeding step S1210, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter after the first ball feeding is “100”. As described above, the counter after the first ball feeding is incremented by one every time the launch control process is started in the first ball fed state. The launch control process is started every 2 msec. Therefore, the case where the value of the counter after the first ball feeding is “100” means that 0.2 sec has elapsed after one gaming ball B1 is supplied on the firing rail 81.

  When the value of the counter after the first ball feeding is “100”, the process proceeds to step S1211 to step S1213. In step S1211, the firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 36b is grasped based on the signal transmitted from the variable resistor 36d of the firing operation device 36. In step S <b> 1212, a driving signal for launching according to the launching intensity grasped in step S <b> 1211 is output to the game ball launching mechanism 34. Thereby, the game ball B1 supplied on the launch rail 81 is launched at a launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 36b. Thereafter, in step S1213, the first ball fed state is canceled.

  When a negative determination is made at step S1205, when a process at step S1208 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S1210, or when a process at step S1213 is executed, an ID registration is executed at step S1214. After executing the firing control process, the firing control process is terminated. The launch control process for ID registration will be described in detail later.

  Next, the management process of game ball usage executed in the payout side MPU 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the management process for using the game ball is executed in step S1016 of the game ball management process (FIG. 23).

  In step S1301, an HI level shot ball detection signal corresponding to detecting the game ball B1 is detected from the shot ball detection sensor 84 for detecting one game ball B1 held on the launch rail 81. It is determined whether it is received. If the firing ball detection sensor 84 is not ON, the value of the launch detection counter provided in the payout side RWM 164 is cleared to “0” in step S1302. The firing detection counter is a counter for measuring in the payout side MPU 162 a period during which the firing ball detection sensor 84 is continuously ON.

  If the firing ball detection sensor 84 is ON, 1 is added to the value of the firing detection counter in step S1303. In a succeeding step S1304, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing detection counter is “2”. If the value of the firing detection counter is “2”, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not it is in an ID registration execution state. If it is not in the ID registration execution state, the ball use processing in steps S1306 to S1308 is executed.

  Specifically, in step S1306, a storage update process for subtracting the remaining sphere information is executed. Specifically, the storage area 164b is updated so that 1 is subtracted from the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b. In the subsequent step S1307, the display of the remaining number display unit 148 is updated so that the remaining sphere information in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b after the update in step S1306 is displayed on the remaining number display unit 148. Thereafter, in step S1308, “1” is set to the normal detection flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. The normal detection flag is a flag for the payout-side MPU 162 to specify that one game ball B1 has been supplied onto the launch rail 81 based on the player's launch operation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that the ID registration execution state is set, in step S1309, “1” is set to the registration detection flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. The in-registration detection flag is a flag for the payout-side MPU 162 to specify that one game ball B1 is supplied onto the launch rail 81 in the ID registration execution state.

  When the process of step S1302 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S1304, when the process of step S1308 is executed, or when the process of step S1309 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether the ID registration execution state is set. If it is not in the ID registration execution state, the processing for the return sphere in steps S1311 to S1316 is executed. If it is in the ID registration execution state, it is not necessary to monitor the return sphere, so steps S1311 to S1316 are performed. The management process for using the game ball is terminated without executing the process.

  In the return ball processing, first, in step S1311, the game ball B1 is detected from the return ball detection sensor 124 for detecting one game ball B1 passing through the return ball collection unit 121. It is determined whether or not a corresponding HI level return ball detection signal is received. If the return ball detection sensor 124 is not ON, after the value of the return detection counter provided in the payout side RMW 164 is cleared to “0” in step S1312, the management process for using this game ball is ended. . The return detection counter is a counter for measuring in the payout side MPU 162 a period during which the return ball detection sensor 124 is continuously ON.

  If the return ball detection sensor 124 is ON, 1 is added to the value of the return detection counter in step S1313. In a succeeding step S1314, it is determined whether or not the value of the return detection counter is “2”. If the value of the return detection counter is not “2”, the game ball use management process is terminated.

  If the value of the return detection counter is “2”, a memory update process for adding the remaining sphere information is executed in step S1315. Specifically, the storage area 164b is updated so that the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S1316, the display of the remaining number display unit 148 is updated so that the remaining sphere information in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b after the update in step S1315 is displayed on the remaining number display unit 148. Thereafter, the management process for using the game ball is ended.

  Next, how the number of usable game balls B1 is increased or decreased will be described. FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing how the number of usable game balls B1 is increased or decreased.

  In a situation where the remaining ball information in the remaining ball information storage area 164b is 1 or more, the shooting operation device 36 is fired by the player at the timing t1. Thereby, one game ball B1 is supplied onto the firing rail 81 by the ball feeding device 86 at the timing t2, which is the timing when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing t1. The game ball B1 is detected by the shot ball detection sensor 84 at a timing t3 which is a timing before being shot, and 1 is subtracted from the remaining ball information in the remaining ball information storage area 164b. Then, at the timing of t4, the game ball B1 on the launch rail 81 is launched by the game ball launch mechanism 34.

  Thereafter, the timing of t5 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing of t2, the timing of t6 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing of t5, the timing of t10 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing of t6, and the timing of 0 from the timing of t10. Similarly to the timing of t2, the timing of t11 when 6 sec has passed, the timing of t12 when 0.6 sec has passed from the timing of t11, and the timing of t13 when 0.6 sec has passed since the timing of t12, respectively, The ball feeding of the game balls B1 and the firing operation of the game balls B1 are performed. At each timing, 1 is subtracted from the remaining sphere information in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b.

  However, in the firing cycle at the timing of t6, the launched game ball B1 flows backward without reaching the game area and is collected by the return ball collection unit 121. In this case, first, one game ball B1 is supplied onto the launch rail 81 by the ball feeder 86 at the timing t6, and this game ball B1 is detected by the launch ball detection sensor 84 and remains at the timing t7. The remaining ball information in the ball information storage area 164b is decremented by 1, and the game ball B1 on the launch rail 81 is launched by the game ball launching mechanism 34 at the timing t8. Thereafter, at time t9, the game ball B1 is detected by the return ball detection sensor 124, whereby 1 is added to the remaining ball information in the remaining ball information storage area 164b.

  Further, the remaining sphere information is “0” in the firing period at the timing of t13. In this case, first, one game ball B1 is supplied onto the launch rail 81 by the ball feeder 86 at the timing t13, and this game ball B1 is detected by the launch ball detection sensor 84 and remains at the timing t14. 1 is subtracted from the remaining sphere information in the sphere information storage area 164b. Thereby, the remaining sphere information becomes “0”, and the output state of the firing permission signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. Thereafter, the game ball B1 on the launch rail 81 is launched by the game ball launch mechanism 34 at the timing of t15. After that, since the output state of the launch permission signal is LOW at the timing t14, the game ball B1 is not newly supplied onto the launch rail 81, and the launch of the game ball B1 is stopped. The

<Return management processing>
Next, the return management process executed in step S803 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level. When the condition establishment signal is not at the HI level, that is, when the player is not operating the firing operation device 36, processing for providing the storage medium M after step S1402 is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the process for providing the storage medium M is executed on condition that the firing operation device 36 is not operated. As a result, it is prohibited to perform the process for providing the storage medium M in a situation where the remaining ball information subtraction process associated with the launch operation is being performed, and the remaining ball information can be handled accurately. .

  In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the all return button 143 of the operation unit 141 is operated. If the all return button 143 has been operated, it is determined in step S1403 whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. The payout MPU 162 receives an opening command from the main MPU 152 at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and further receives an ending command from the main MPU 152 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and therefore grasps whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, that is, if the opening / closing execution mode is in effect, the return management process is terminated as it is. This makes it possible to invalidate the operation of all return buttons 143 during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the configuration in which the game ball B1 cannot be replenished to the ball tray unit 71 from the outside and the remaining ball information is 1 or more and the game ball B1 is allowed to be launched, the full return button 143 is operated. It is impossible to fire the game ball B1 at least between the time until the storage medium M is discharged and the time when the storage medium M or bill is inserted and a new set of remaining ball information is performed. . If such an event occurs due to an erroneous operation of the all return button 143 during the opening / closing execution mode, the round game cannot be suitably digested. On the other hand, it is difficult to think that the all return button 143 is intentionally operated during the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, the inconvenience as described above is prevented by invalidating the operation of the all return button 143 during the opening / closing execution mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404, and it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the prize ball standby flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. The payout side MPU 162 can receive a standby start command indicating the contents when any value of each prize ball counter provided in the main side RWM 154 becomes 1 or more, and each prize ball counter When all the values are “0”, a standby end command indicating the contents can be received. The winning ball waiting flag is set to “1” when a waiting start command is received, and a process for adding to the remaining ball information for the winning ball command received simultaneously with the waiting end command is received. “0” is cleared when the process is completed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, that is, if the award ball processing has not been completed, the return management processing is terminated as it is. This makes it possible to invalidate the operation of the all return button 143 in a situation where the processing of the prize ball is not completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the remaining ball information from becoming “1” or more based on the winning ball immediately after the storage medium M is ejected based on the operation of the all return button 143.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1404, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, frequency information is read from the frequency information storage area 164a of the payout RWM 164, and in step S1406, remaining ball information is read from the remaining ball information storage area 164b of the payout RWM 164.

  In a succeeding step S1407, it is determined whether or not the frequency information read in the step S1405 is 1 or more. If the frequency information is 1 or more, in step S1408, a return command including the read frequency information is set as an output target to the management side MPU 172. The return command is output to the management side MPU 172 after the return management process is completed. Thereafter, in step S1409, frequency information initialization processing is executed. Specifically, the frequency information storage area 164a is cleared to “0”, and the frequency display unit 147 is controlled to display “0” on the frequency display unit 147 of the operation unit 141.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1407, or if the process of step S1409 is executed, it is determined in step S1410 whether or not the remaining sphere information read in step S1406 is 1 or more. If the remaining sphere information is “0”, the return management process is terminated as it is. If the remaining sphere information is 1 or more, in step S1411, a return command including the read remaining sphere information is set as an output target to the management side MPU 172. In this case, if a return command has already been set as an output target in step S1408, the read remaining ball information is included in the return command in a state distinguished from frequency information. As described above, the return command is output toward the management side MPU 172 after the return management process is completed. Thereafter, in step S1412, the remaining sphere information is initialized. Specifically, the remaining sphere information storage area 164b is cleared to “0” and the remaining number display unit 148 is controlled to display “0” on the remaining number display unit 148 of the operation unit 141. Thereafter, the return management process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1402, the partial return management process is terminated after executing a partial return management process in step S1413. The management process for partial return will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the increase instruction button 144 of the operation unit 141 has been operated. When the increase instruction button 144 is operated, in step S1502, the partial return ball information stored in the partial return ball information storage area 164c provided in the payout RWM 164 is the remaining ball information storage area of the payout RWM 164. It is determined whether it is less than the remaining sphere information of 164b.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, an addition process for partial return is executed in step S1503. Specifically, the storage area 164c is updated so that the value of the partial return ball information storage area 164c is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S1504, a display update process for partial return is executed. In this process, display control is performed on the remaining number display unit 148 so that the number corresponding to the partially returned ball information stored in the partially returned ball information storage area 164c is displayed on the remaining number display unit 148. That is, the remaining number display portion 148 basically displays the number corresponding to the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b, but when a partly returning operation is performed. The remaining number display unit 148 is also used as a display unit for displaying the number corresponding to the partial return ball information stored in the partial return ball information storage area 164c.

  Thereafter, in step S1505, “5000” is set in a partially returning counter provided in the payout side RWM 164. The partially returning counter is a counter for measuring the valid period of the operation when the increase instruction button 144 or the decrease instruction button 145 of the operation unit 141 is operated.

  When the value of the partially returning counter is 1 or more, the remaining number display unit 148 displays a number corresponding to the partially returned ball information stored in the partially returned ball information storage area 164c. When the value of the part returning counter becomes “0”, the number corresponding to the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b is displayed on the remaining number display section 148. Further, the value of the partially returning counter is cleared to “0” when the condition satisfaction signal becomes the HI level, and is also cleared to “0” when the all return button 143 is operated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1506 whether or not the decrease instruction button 145 of the operation unit 141 has been operated. If the decrease instruction button 145 is operated, it is determined in step S1507 whether or not the partial return ball information in the partial return ball information storage area 164c provided in the payout side RWM 164 is 1 or more. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, a partial return subtraction process is executed in step S1508. Specifically, the storage area 164c is updated so that the value of the partially returned ball information storage area 164c is decremented by 1.

  In a succeeding step S1509, a display update process for partial return is executed. In this process, display control is performed on the remaining number display unit 148 so that the number corresponding to the partially returned ball information stored in the partially returned ball information storage area 164c is displayed on the remaining number display unit 148. Thereafter, in step S1510, “5000” is set in the partially returning counter of the payout side RWM 164.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1506, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the determination button 146 of the operation unit 141 has been operated. If the enter button 146 is operated, a return command including the partial return ball information stored in the partial return ball information storage area 164c is set as an output target to the management side MPU 172 in step S1512. As a result, the partial return ball information corresponding to the operation of the increase instruction button 144 and the decrease instruction button 145 is output to the management side MPU 172.

  In a succeeding step S1513, the partially returning counter is cleared to “0”. In step S1514, the partial return ball information stored in the partial return ball information storage area 164c is subtracted from the residual ball information stored in the residual ball information storage area 164b, and the information of the subtraction result is newly updated. The remaining sphere information storage area 164b is overwritten as the remaining sphere information. At this time, the value of the partially returned ball information storage area 164c is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, in step S1515, display control is performed on the remaining number display unit 148 so that the number corresponding to the remaining ball information stored in the remaining ball information storage area 164b is displayed on the remaining number display unit 148.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1502, a process in step S1505 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1507, a process in step S1510 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1511, or a step If the process of S1515 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1516. In step S1516, it is determined whether the value of the partially returning counter is 1 or more.

  If the value of the partial return counter is “0”, the management process for partial return is terminated as it is, and if it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1517. In step S1517, 1 is subtracted from the value of the partially returning counter. In a succeeding step S1518, it is determined whether or not the value of the partially returning counter is “0”. If the value of the partial return counter is not “0”, the management processing for partial return is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, the remaining ball information storage area 164b stores it in step S1519. The remaining number display unit 148 is controlled to display the number corresponding to the remaining sphere information displayed on the remaining number display unit 148. At this time, the value of the partially returned ball information storage area 164c is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the management process for partially returning is completed.

  Here, when the increase instruction button 144 or the decrease instruction button 145 is operated, “5000” is set in the partially returning counter. Further, when the output of the LOW level condition establishment signal is continued and the all return button 143 is not operated, the value of the partly returning counter every time the return management process (FIG. 29) is activated. 1 is subtracted. The return management process is executed by a timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) that is activated at a cycle of 4 msec. When the value of the partial return counter becomes “0”, the partial return operation up to that point is invalidated. In other words, even if the increase instruction button 144 or the decrease instruction button 145 is operated, any of the increase instruction button 144, the decrease instruction button 145, and the decision button 146 until a predetermined period (specifically, 20 sec) elapses. If is not operated, the operation for partial return up to that point is invalidated.

  Next, the medium supply management process executed by the management MPU 172 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process for medium supply is executed in step S308 of the main process (FIG. 13) in the management side MPU 172.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether or not it is in a returning state by determining whether or not “1” is set in a returning flag provided in the management-side RWM 174. If it is not in the returning state, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not a return command has been received from the payout side MPU 162. As described above, the return command is transmitted from the payout MPU 162 when the full return button 143 of the operation unit 141 is operated or when the decision button 146 is operated after the operation for partial return. The return command transmitted based on the operation of the decision button 146 includes only the remaining sphere information, whereas the return command transmitted based on the operation of the all return button 143 includes the frequency information and There are cases where only one of the remaining sphere information is included and cases where both of them are included.

  If the return command has not been received, the management process for supplying the medium is terminated as it is. If a return command has been received, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not frequency information is included in the current return command. If the frequency information is included, a write instruction signal is transmitted to the medium circuit 177 so that the frequency information is written to the storage medium M in step S1604. As a result, the medium circuit 177 writes the frequency information to the storage medium M. After that, in step S1605, the returning state is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1603, or if the process of step S1605 is executed, it is determined in step S1606 whether or not the remaining ball information is included in the current return command. If the remaining sphere information is not included, the management process for supplying the medium is terminated as it is.

  If the remaining sphere information is included, a write instruction signal is transmitted to the medium circuit 177 so that the remaining sphere information is written to the storage medium M in step S1607. As a result, the medium circuit 177 writes the remaining sphere information in the storage medium M. In this case, if the return command this time includes not only the remaining sphere information but also the frequency information, and the process of step S1604 is executed, the remaining sphere information is stored in the storage medium M in which the frequency information is written. Is written to. In the subsequent step S1608, when the return state is not yet set, the return state is set. Thereafter, the management process for supplying the medium is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is in the returning state, it is determined in step S1609 whether writing to the storage medium M is completed in the medium circuit 177. If the writing has not been completed, the management process for supplying the medium is terminated as it is. If the writing has been completed, in step S1610, the drive unit 176c provided corresponding to the medium outlet 134 in the management unit 131 is driven and controlled, so that the storage medium M that has been written is recorded as a medium. It discharges from the discharge port 134. Thereafter, in step S1611, the medium supply management process is terminated after the returning state is canceled.

  Next, the display content of the remaining number display unit 148 when a partial return of the remaining sphere information is executed will be described. 32A to 32D are front views of the operation unit 141. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, in a situation where “25” corresponding to the frequency information is displayed on the frequency display unit 147 and “7243” corresponding to the remaining sphere information is displayed on the remaining number display unit 148, As shown in FIG. 32 (b), based on the increase instruction button 144 being operated, the remaining number display portion 148 displays the number corresponding to the partially returned ball information. In this case, the remaining number display portion 148 displays “52” corresponding to the partially returned ball information.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 32C, for example, the decrease instruction button 145 is operated so that the number of game balls B1 corresponding to coffee is reached, and the partial return ball information displayed on the remaining number display portion 148 is “ 50 "is adjusted. When the enter button 146 is operated in this state, the storage medium M in which the remaining ball information “50” is written is ejected. Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), in the remaining number display portion 148, the number (“7193”) corresponding to the remaining ball information is subtracted by the number of game balls B1 that have been partially returned. Is displayed.

  As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, a large number of game balls B1 are circulated, the player cannot touch the game balls B1, and the winning ball when a winning occurs is the remaining ball information as the player information. To be granted. Therefore, it is not possible to exchange drinks or cigarettes using the actual game ball B1 in the game hall. On the other hand, by making it possible to return not only the remaining ball information but also a part of the remaining ball information, the remaining ball information necessary for the game remains in the pachinko machine 10 and the amount necessary for the above exchange. It becomes possible for the player to obtain the storage medium M in which only the data is written, and the above exchange can be suitably performed.

  Further, when the player performs a partial return operation on the operation unit 141, the storage medium M in which the number of remaining ball information corresponding to the operation is written is ejected from the management unit 131. . Thereby, the player can exchange the product by handing the storage medium M directly to the store clerk on the game hall side. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand the exchange operation of the product.

  In addition, in a situation where the shooting operation device 36 is operated by the player, the operation for partial return is invalidated. This prohibits the processing for providing the storage medium M in a situation where the subtraction processing of the remaining sphere information accompanying the launch operation is being performed, and allows the remaining sphere information to be handled accurately. It becomes. In addition, since the game ball B1 is prioritized for launch, for example, when a partial return operation is performed during the round game in the open / close execution mode, the launch of the game ball B1 is stopped accordingly. The occurrence of the situation is prevented.

  In addition, since the operation unit 141 is provided with operation buttons 144 to 146 for partial return, the player can use the dedicated operation button when exchanging for a product using a part of the remaining ball information. Since it is sufficient to operate 144 to 146, the operability for the player at the time of such exchange can be improved.

  Further, since the number of remaining sphere information to be used is designated by the operation of the operation buttons 144 to 146, it is not necessary to provide an operation button for each type of product to be exchanged. Therefore, the number of operation buttons can be reduced.

<ID registration process>
Next, the ID registration process executed in step S804 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) will be described.

  Prior to the description of the ID registration process, the configuration of the game ball B1 used in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 33A is a longitudinal sectional view of the game ball B1, and FIG. 33B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the IC tag 181 embedded in the game ball B1.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the game ball B1 is formed in a spherical shape using a non-conductive synthetic resin such as an ABS resin as a base material, and the IC tag 181 is embedded in the base material. Yes. The IC tag 181 is formed with a size smaller than the game ball B1, for example, 3.5 mm × 3.5 mm × 0.8 mm, and is embedded in the center of the game ball B1. Further, the IC tag 181 is not exposed on the surface of the game ball B1, and the IC tag 181 is surrounded by a base material.

  The IC tag 181 is a passive tag, and includes an IC chip 182 and an antenna member 183 as shown in FIG. The IC chip 182 is formed as an integrated circuit, and has a control unit and a memory area. The memory area is configured by a non-volatile memory (ROM) in which data cannot be rewritten, and its storage capacity is, for example, 128 bits. In the memory area, ID information unique to the game ball B1 is stored as identification information.

  The ID information unique to the game ball B1 is set so that no other game ball B1 having the same ID information exists. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls B1 having the same ID information may exist with a considerably low probability (for example, a probability of 1 / 100,000). The game balls B1 having the same ID information may not exist, and the game balls B1 having the same ID information in the same pachinko machine 10 may not exist. In order to be able to recognize each game ball B1 individually in the pachinko machine 10, at least the ID information of each game ball B1 circulating in the same pachinko machine 10 may be different.

  The antenna member 183 has a fine line shape and is formed using a metal such as aluminum or copper. The antenna member 183 is formed as a spiral antenna so as to make a plurality of rounds around the IC chip 182 so that the IC chip 182 exists at the center thereof. The antenna member 183 is set to a predetermined length dimension so that the operating frequency becomes a predetermined frequency (specifically, 2.45 GHz).

  The ID information of the IC chip 182 is configured to be called by the control unit and transmitted as a radio wave from the antenna member 183. The antenna member 183 has a communicable distance set to about 3 cm, and when the game ball B1 is held at the launch standby position on the launch rail 81, the reader device 85 provided around the launch standby position. Is included in the range of the communicable distance.

  The reader device 85 outputs a ringing wave based on an instruction from the payout MPU 162. When the ringing wave is output, the IC chip 182 is activated and includes ID information from the antenna member 183. Radio waves are output as response waves. As a result, the ID information of the game ball B1 held at the launch standby position on the launch rail 81 can be read by the reader device 85.

  On the other hand, the game ball B1 that is not held at the launch standby position, for example, the game ball B1 that is prevented from moving to the launch rail 81 by the ball feeding device 86, is present on the game area side from the launch rail 81. For the game ball B1 and the game ball B1 existing on the back side of the support base body 31, the reader device 85 is not included in the communicable distance. Accordingly, the reader device 85 does not receive a response wave from the game ball B1 that is not held at the firing standby position.

  Here, since the game ball B1 uses the synthetic resin as the base material as described above, there is a concern that the game ball B1 is extremely light compared to the conventional game ball formed using metal. When the game ball B1 becomes extremely lighter than before, the manner of flowing down the game area is greatly different, and there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  In contrast, as shown in FIG. 33A, a plurality of weight pieces 184 for weight adjustment are dispersed and embedded in the game ball B1. The weight piece 184 is made of a metal such as lead so that the weight per unit volume is larger than that of the base material. The embedding positions of the plurality of weight pieces 184 are set so that the center of gravity of the game ball B1 comes to the center. In addition, the plurality of weight pieces 184 are embedded so as not to be exposed on the surface of the game ball B1. Further, the weight pieces 184 are arranged apart from each other so as not to disturb the communication of the IC tag 181. Accordingly, the ID information from the game ball B1 can be read by the reader device 85, and the aspect of the game ball B1 flowing down the game area is less discomfort than the conventional metal game ball. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the base portion formed using the base material made of synthetic resin in the game ball B1 is formed with a central portion formed of a relatively flexible base material so that the IC tag 181 and the weight piece 184 can be easily embedded. The outer layer may be formed of a relatively hard base material and is less likely to be worn or deformed when the game ball B1 is fired or the game area flows down.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an ID registration process.

  The pachinko machine 10 is set with a predetermined number (specifically, 100) of game balls B1 that are set in advance, and the specific number of game balls B1 circulates in the pachinko machine 10 during the game. It will be. In the ID registration process, the ID information is read from each of the specific number of game balls B1, and the read ID information is stored in the payout RWM 164.

  Specifically, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the ID registration execution state is set. If not in the ID registration execution state, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not a command corresponding to the start of ID registration is received from the main MPU 152.

  A command corresponding to the start of ID registration is transmitted from the main MPU 152 to the payout MPU 162 when the second delete button 61c provided in the main control device 61 is operated. The second erase button 61c is used to select a new specific number of game balls B1 when the number of game balls B1 set in the pachinko machine 10 is less than a specific number or more than a specific number. It is operated when performed on the machine 10.

  By the way, when the specific number of game balls B1 already set in the pachinko machine 10 is discharged and a new specific number of game balls B1 is set, first, the locking state of the front door 22 with respect to the main body base 21 is released. Then, the front door 22 is opened. Thereafter, an operator directly applies an external force to the supply member 88 of the ball feeding device 86 to place the supply member 88 at the supply position. Thereby, all the game balls B <b> 1 stored in the ball tray 71 are discharged via the ball feeding device 86. After all of the old set of game balls B1 have been discharged, a specific number of game balls B1 of the new set are loaded into the discharge collection unit 101 of the support base 31. In this case, since the front door 22 is opened, the shutter member 106 is closed, and the newly set specific number of game balls B1 stays in the discharge collection unit 101. Thereafter, when the front door 22 is closed, the shutter member 106 is opened, and the newly set specific number of game balls B1 flows into the ball tray portion 71 from the discharge collection portion 101.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1702, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the ID registration flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. The ID registration flag is a flag that is set to “1” when ID information is registered for a specific number of game balls B1. In addition, the ID registration flag is used when the supply of backup power to the payout RWM 164 is stopped or after the initialization process of the payout RWM 164 is executed even after the ID information is registered. “0” is cleared.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the ID registration processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702 or a negative determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1704, the ID registration execution state is set. In the subsequent step S1705, the ID information storage area 164d provided in the payout side RWM 164 is erased. The ID information storage area 164d is an area for storing ID information read from the set number of game balls B1.

  In the subsequent step S1706, the output state of the ID registration signal is set to the HI level. The ID registration signal is a signal that is output from the payout side MPU 162 toward the launch control device 65, and in order to register the ID information even when the launch operation device 36 is not operated, the game ball B1 is used. The HI level is set when the ball feeding device 86 and the game ball launching mechanism 34 are driven and controlled to launch toward the return ball collecting unit 121. Thereby, the launch control device 65 executes launch control for ID registration. The details of the launch control will be described later in detail.

  When the ID registration execution state is set, a registration start command is output from the payout MPU 162 to the main MPU 152, and when the ID registration execution state is canceled, registration is performed from the payout MPU 162 to the main MPU 152. An end command may be output. In this case, when the registration start command is received, the main MPU 152 outputs a registration start notification command to the sound emission control device 62, and when receiving the registration end command, the main MPU 152 ends the registration toward the sound emission control device 62. By outputting the notification command, in the ID registration execution state, the notification to that effect may be executed by the speaker device 37 or the symbol display device 46a.

  In the subsequent step S1707, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level. Thereby, even if the launch operation device 36 is operated and the remaining sphere information is 1 or more, launch control is performed in an ID registration mode. Thereafter, the ID registration process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1701 that the ID registration is being executed, the launch management process at the time of ID registration is executed in step S1708, and the ID acquisition process is executed in step S1709, followed by the real ID registration. The process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the launch management process and the ID acquisition process at the time of ID registration will be described. First, the launch management process during ID registration will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether or not it is in an interrupted state by determining whether or not “1” is set in an interrupt flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. If it is not in the suspended state, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the front door 22 is being opened. If the front door 22 is not open, the launch management process at the time of registering the real ID is terminated as it is. If the front door 22 is being opened, the interrupted state is set in step S1803, and the output state of the ID registration signal is set to the LOW level in subsequent step S1804. Thereafter, the launch management process at the time of registration of the present ID is terminated. That is, even when the game ball B1 is automatically launched in the ID registration mode, when the front door 22 is opened, the launch of the game ball B1 is interrupted.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that it is in the suspended state, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the front door 22 is closed. If the front door 22 is not closed, the launch management process at the time of registration of this ID is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the front door 22 is closed, the interrupted state is canceled in step S1806, and the output state of the ID registration signal is set to the HI level in subsequent step S1807. Thereafter, the launch management process at the time of registration of the present ID is terminated. Thereby, the launch of the game ball B1 in the ID registration mode is resumed.

  Here, the ID control launch control process executed by the launch control device 65 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The launch control process for ID registration is executed in step S1214 in the launch control process (FIG. 26).

  In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the ID registration signal output from the payout MPU 162 is at the HI level. If the ID registration signal is at the HI level, 1 is added to the value of the second firing period counter provided in the launch control device 65 in step S1902, and if the ID registration signal is at the LOW level. In step S1903, the value of the second firing period counter is cleared to “0”. The second firing cycle counter sets the firing cycle of the game ball B1 to a predetermined value in a situation where the game ball B1 should be launched using the ball feeder 86 and the game ball launch mechanism 34 when registering the ID information. It is a counter used for.

  When the process of step S1902 is executed or when the process of step S1903 is executed, it is determined in step S1904 whether the second ball has been fed. The state in which the second ball has been fed is a state in which the supply of one game ball B1 onto the firing rail 81 by the ball feeding device 86 has already been completed when the ID information is registered.

  If the second ball has not been fed, it is determined in step S1905 whether the value of the second firing period counter is “100”. The second firing period counter is incremented by 1 each time the firing control process is activated in a state where the ID registration signal is at the HI level. Further, the launch control process is started every 2 msec. Therefore, the value of the second firing period counter is “100” means that the output state of the HI level continues after the ID registration signal becomes HI level, or one This means that 0.2 sec has elapsed in the state where the output state of the HI level ID registration signal has continued since the game ball B1 was launched for registration of ID information.

  Here, the launch cycle is shorter than the launch cycle (specifically, 0.6 sec) when the game ball B1 is launched based on the operation of the launch operation device 36 by the player. This makes it possible to launch the game ball B1 in a short period when registering ID information while shortening the period required for registering ID information, while making the launch period of the game ball B1 long to some extent during gaming. Figured.

  If the value of the second firing period counter is not “100”, the firing control process for this ID registration is terminated as it is. When the value of the second firing period counter is “100”, the process proceeds to step S1906 to step S1908.

  In step S1906, the value of the second firing period counter is cleared to “0”. In step S1907, a driving signal for ball feeding is output to the ball feeding device 86. In step S1908, the second ball feeding completed state is set. Set. Thereafter, the firing control process for registering this ID is terminated. When the ball feed driving signal is output, the ball feed device 86 supplies one game ball B1 from the ball tray portion 71 onto the launch rail 81.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, 1 is added to the value of the second post-ball feed counter provided in the firing control device 65 in step S1909. The counter after the second ball feed controls the driving of the game ball launching mechanism 34 after one game ball B1 is supplied onto the launch rail 81 by the ball feed device 86 at the time of registration of the ID information, and the game ball B1. This is a counter for specifying the timing of launching in the launch control device 65.

  In a succeeding step S1910, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter after the second ball feeding is “50”. When the second ball feeding counter is in the ID registration execution state, 1 is added each time the launch control process is started in the second ball feeding completed state. Further, the launch control process is started every 2 msec. Therefore, the case where the value of the counter after the second ball feeding is “50” means that 0.1 sec has elapsed after one gaming ball B1 is supplied on the firing rail 81. The game ball B1 is detected by the shot ball detection sensor 84 during the time from when one game ball B1 is supplied on the launch rail 81 until the game ball B1 is launched for registration of ID information. The time is set longer than the longest time required for the reader device 85 to be driven and controlled to read the ID information from the game ball B1. Therefore, it is possible to reliably read the ID information.

  When the value of the counter after the second ball feeding is not “50”, the firing control process for the real ID registration is finished as it is. When the value of the counter after the second ball feeding is “50”, the process proceeds to step S1911 to step S1912.

  In step S1911, a driving signal for launching corresponding to the ID registration is output to the game ball launching mechanism 34. Thereby, the game ball B1 supplied on the launch rail 81 is launched with the launch intensity corresponding to the registration of the ID information. In this case, the firing intensity is uniquely determined regardless of the amount of operation of the operation handle 36b, and reaches the guide rail at a position closer to the game area than the end on the firing destination side of the firing rail 81. It is set so that the game ball B1 starts to fall at a position where it does not, and the game ball B1 is collected by the return ball collection unit 121. Thereafter, in step S1912, after releasing the second ball fed state, the ID control launch control process is terminated.

  Next, the ID acquisition process executed by the payout MPU 162 in step S1709 of the ID registration process (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the registration detection flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. As already described, the registration detection flag is a flag that is set when the game ball B1 is supplied to the launch rail 81 and the game ball B1 is detected by the launch ball detection sensor 84 in the ID registration execution state.

  If “1” is set in the registering detection flag, ringing wave output processing is executed in step S2002. Specifically, an output instruction signal for instructing the output of the ringing wave is output from the payout side MPU 162 to the reader device 85. As a result, a ringing wave having a predetermined frequency set in common in the IC tag 181 of each game ball B1 is output from the reader device 85. Thereafter, in step S2003, the registration detection flag is cleared to “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, or if the process of step S2003 is executed, it is determined in step S2004 whether the reader device 85 has received a response wave from the game ball B1. If the response wave has not been received, the present ID acquisition process is terminated. If a response wave has been received, ID information search processing is executed in step S2005. In the ID information search process, the reader device 85 grasps whether or not the ID information included in the response wave received this time is already stored in the ID information storage area 164d of the payout RWM 164.

  In a succeeding step S2006, it is determined whether or not the ID information received this time is already stored in the ID information storage area 164d. If it has already been stored, the ID acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the ID information received this time is not stored in the ID information storage area 164d, the ID information is written in the ID information storage area 164d in step S2007.

  In a succeeding step S2008, it is determined whether or not the ID information stored in the ID information storage area 164d has reached a specific number, specifically 100. If the specific number is not reached, the ID acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the specific number has been reached, after the ID registration execution state is canceled in step S2009, the present ID acquisition process is terminated.

  Next, how ID information is registered will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 38 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state where a specific number of game balls B1 are stored in the ball tray 71, and FIG. 38 (b) is a firing mode of the game balls B1 when ID information is registered. FIG. 38C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ID information storage area 164d of the payout RWM 164.

  The storage area that bulges forward from the window panel 52 in the ball tray 71 is formed so as to be able to store more game balls B1 than a specific number. Therefore, when the old set of game balls B1 is removed and a new set of game balls B1 is inserted and the front door 22 is closed, the specific number of game balls B1 is shown in FIG. Thus, all are accommodated in the storage area.

  Thereafter, an ID registration execution state is entered by operating the second deletion button 61c of the main control device 61. In the ID registration execution state, one game ball B1 is automatically launched at a cycle of 0.2 sec. Also, since the game ball B1 is fired at the firing strength for registration of ID information, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the game ball B1 does not reach the guide rail on the game area side and is returned for the return ball. Collected by the unit 121.

  In this case, the ID information is read by the reader device 85 from each game ball B1 sequentially supplied onto the launch rail 81. As a result, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the ID information storage area 164d of the payout RWM 164 stores the ID information of each specific number of game balls B1. Specifically, the ID information storage area 164d is set with an ID information storage area in a one-to-one correspondence with information of a specific number (“0” to “99”). The ID information read by the reader device 85 is sequentially stored in the ID information storage area. Then, the ID information of the newly set specific number of game balls B1 is stored in the ID information storage area 164d. In the ID information storage area 164d, a confirmed flag is set in correspondence with each number of information on a one-to-one basis. The confirmed flag is a flag used when monitoring the game ball B1 through reading ID information.

  In the configuration in which the ID information is registered as described above, the ID information is registered in a situation where the game ball B1 passes through a predetermined route. As a result, the number of reader devices 85 can be reduced, and the receivable range of the reader device 85 need not be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suitably receive the ID information using the reader device 85.

  In addition, the game path is not included in the predetermined route through which the game ball B1 passes when registering the ID information, and the moving distance is shorter than that when flowing down the game area. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the work when the ID information is registered. In addition, when the ID information is registered, the game ball B1 is launched with a launch cycle shorter than the normal launch cycle. From this point as well, it is possible to shorten the work when the ID information is registered.

  In addition, when registering the ID information, the game ball B1 is launched toward the return ball collecting unit 121. As a result, in the case where the work time is reduced when registering the ID information, the existing configuration can be used for circulation of the game ball B1.

<ID monitoring process>
Next, the ID monitoring process executed in step S805 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) will be described.

  The ID monitoring process is a process for executing the monitoring of the game ball B1 circulating in the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where the game ball B1 is being launched toward the game area based on the operation of the launch operation device 36. Further, the monitoring is always executed in a situation where the game ball B1 is being launched toward the game area based on the operation of the launch operation device 36.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the ID monitoring process.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the post-output state of the ringing wave is determined by determining whether or not “1” is set in the post-output flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. If it is not in the post-output state, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not “1” is set in the normal detection flag provided in the payout RWM 164. As described above, the normal detection flag indicates that the game ball B1 is supplied to the launch rail 81 in a situation where the game ball B1 is being launched based on the operation of the launch operation device 36, and the game ball B1 is detected by the launch ball detection sensor 84. This flag is set when detected.

  If “1” is set in the normal detection flag, ringing wave output processing is executed in step S2103. Specifically, an output instruction signal for instructing the output of the ringing wave is output from the payout side MPU 162 to the reader device 85. As a result, a ringing wave having a predetermined frequency set in common in the IC tag 181 of each game ball B1 is output from the reader device 85. Thereafter, in step S2104, the normal detection flag is cleared to “0”, and in step S2105, a state after the ringing wave is output is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2101 that the state is after the ringing wave is output, it is determined in step S2106 whether the reader device 85 has received a response wave from the game ball B1. If no response wave has been received, 1 is added to the value of the reception waiting counter provided in the payout-side RWM 164 in step S2107. The reception waiting counter is a counter for specifying, in the payout side MPU 162, the reception waiting time of the response wave after outputting the calling wave from the reader device 85 when the game ball B1 is monitored.

  In a succeeding step S2108, it is determined whether or not the value of the reception waiting counter is “75”. The ID monitoring process is executed by a timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) activated at a cycle of 4 msec. Until the response wave is received in the state after the ringing wave is output, the process of step S2107 is executed every time the ID monitoring process is executed. Therefore, in step S2108, it is determined whether 0.3 sec has elapsed without receiving a response wave after outputting a ringing wave from the reader device 85.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 81 and detected by the firing ball detection sensor 84 cannot transmit a response wave to the output of the calling wave of the reader device 85. It means that it is a non-regular game ball. In this case, after outputting the first ID abnormality command to the main MPU 152 in step S2109, the infinite loop is continued as it is.

  When the main MPU 152 receives the first ID abnormality command, the main MPU 152 stops the progress of the subsequent game and makes a sound emission by making a setting so that an affirmative determination is made in step S406 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By outputting a command corresponding to the first ID abnormality command to the control device 62, abnormality notification corresponding to the first ID abnormality is executed. Although the mode of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, the manager of the game hall can recognize that the first ID abnormality has occurred in at least one of the abnormality notification light emitting unit 53, the speaker device 37, and the symbol display device 46a. In this case, a configuration in which abnormality notification is executed can be considered. Further, in addition to or instead of the abnormality notification by the pachinko machine 10 itself, an abnormality occurrence signal corresponding to the occurrence of the first ID abnormality may be output to the gaming hall management computer.

  As a case where an irregular game ball that does not output a response wave exists in the pachinko machine 10, for example, an illegal act of throwing a game ball smaller than the regular game ball B1 into the pachinko machine 10 is assumed. When such a small game ball is inserted, it becomes easier to win a prize than the regular game ball B1. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the used game balls are circulated without being discharged, so that a small irregular game ball is repeatedly used in the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by executing the processing as described above, it is possible to prohibit the use of the game ball B1 and the provision of the storage medium M when the illegal act is performed. In addition, through the execution of the abnormality notification, it is possible to notify the game hall manager that the first ID abnormality has occurred.

  The abnormal state is canceled by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while operating both the first erase button 61b and the second erase button 61c after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The pachinko machine 10 may be released only by turning on the power again. The pachinko machine 10 may be released by operating at least one of the first erasing button 61b and the second erasing button 61c without requiring the power to be turned on again. It is good also as a structure to be made. In addition, when the first ID is abnormal, while notifying the abnormality, at least a part of the use of the game ball B1, the provision of the storage medium M, and the progress of the game may not be prohibited. It is good also as a structure which is not prohibited.

  Here, the contents of the ID information monitoring process when the game ball B1 is launched based on the launch operation by the player and the contents when the first ID abnormality occurs will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. .

  40 (a) shows the firing period, FIG. 40 (b) shows the state of the ball feeding operation, FIG. 40 (c) shows the state of the firing operation, and FIG. 40 (d) does not cause the first ID abnormality. FIG. 40 (e) shows the state of reception of the response wave when the first ID abnormality does not occur, and FIG. 40 (f) shows the state of the calling wave when the first ID abnormality occurs. FIG. 40 (g) shows how the response wave is received when the first ID abnormality does not occur, and FIG. 40 (h) shows whether or not the first ID abnormality occurs.

  First, the contents of the ID information monitoring process when the first ID abnormality does not occur will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (e).

  When the measurement of the firing cycle is completed at the timing of t21, one game ball B1 is supplied onto the firing rail 81 by the ball feeding device 86. The game ball B1 is detected by the shot ball detection sensor 84 at a timing t22, which is a timing before being launched, and a calling wave is output from the reader device 85 based on the detected ball. Thereafter, a response wave is output from the game ball B1 at the timing of t23, and the payout side MPU 162 receives the ID information of the game ball B1. Then, at the timing of t24, the game ball B1 on the launch rail 81 is launched by the game ball launch mechanism 34. Further, such an operation is repeated also at the timing t25.

  Next, a case where the first ID abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) and FIGS. 40 (f) to 40 (h).

  As in the case where the first ID abnormality does not occur, one game ball is supplied onto the firing rail 81 by the ball feeding device 86 by completing the measurement of the firing cycle at the timing of t21, and the leader at the timing of t22. A ringing wave is output from the device 85. However, no response wave is output from the game ball, and the reception waiting time elapses. Then, at the timing of t31, the occurrence of the first ID abnormality is identified, and the already explained abnormality handling process is executed.

  In this case, the timing specified as the occurrence of the first ID abnormality is a timing before the timing at which the measurement of the next firing cycle is completed (timing at t25). Thereby, although the ID information is not received from the non-regular game ball, the non-regular game ball is found because the ID information is received from the next regular game ball B1 to be supplied. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that it becomes impossible to do this.

  By the way, the timing specified as the occurrence of the first ID abnormality is the timing after the non-regular game ball is fired, but when the first ID abnormality occurs, the progress of the subsequent game is prevented. Therefore, unauthorized acquisition of profits by the unauthorized game ball is prevented.

  Returning to the description of the ID monitoring process (FIG. 39), when an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, that is, when the reader device 85 receives a response wave from the game ball B1 before the reception waiting time elapses, step S2110 is performed. Proceed to In step S2110, the state after the ringing wave is output is canceled, and in step S2111, the value of the reception waiting counter is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, in step S2112, ID information comparison processing is executed. In the ID information comparison process, it is determined whether or not the ID information received this time matches any of a specific number of ID information stored in the ID information storage area 164d of the payout-side RWM 164. In the subsequent step S2113, it is determined whether or not the ID information received this time matches any ID information in the ID information storage area 164d as a result of the comparison process in step S2112.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2113, the game ball supplied on the launch rail 81 and detected by the launch ball detection sensor 84 has irregular ID information that is different from the ID information registered in the pachinko machine 10. It means that it is a game ball. In this case, after outputting the second ID abnormality command to the main MPU 152 in step S2114, the infinite loop is continued as it is.

  When the main MPU 152 receives the second ID abnormality command, the main MPU 152 performs a setting to make an affirmative determination in step S406 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), thereby stopping the progress of the subsequent game and emitting the sound. By outputting a command corresponding to the second ID abnormality command to the control device 62, abnormality notification corresponding to the second ID abnormality is executed. An aspect of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, but an aspect in which the manager of the game hall can recognize that the second ID abnormality has occurred in at least one of the abnormality notification light emitting unit 53, the speaker device 37, and the symbol display device 46a. In this case, a configuration in which abnormality notification is executed can be considered. Further, in addition to or instead of the abnormality notification by the pachinko machine 10 itself, an abnormality occurrence signal corresponding to the occurrence of the second ID abnormality may be output to the gaming hall management computer.

  As a case where the non-regular game ball that outputs unregistered ID information exists in the pachinko machine 10, for example, an illegal act of throwing a game ball smaller than the regular game ball B1 into the pachinko machine 10 is assumed. When such a small game ball is inserted, it becomes easier to win a prize than the regular game ball B1 as already described. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the used game balls are circulated without being discharged, so that a small irregular game ball is repeatedly used in the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by executing the processing as described above, it is possible to prohibit the use of the game ball B1 and the provision of the storage medium M when the illegal act is performed. In addition, through the execution of the abnormality notification, it is possible to notify the game hall manager that the second ID abnormality has occurred.

  The abnormal state is canceled by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while operating both the first erase button 61b and the second erase button 61c after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The pachinko machine 10 may be released only by turning on the power again. The pachinko machine 10 may be released by operating at least one of the first erasing button 61b and the second erasing button 61c without requiring the power to be turned on again. It is good also as a structure to be made. Further, when the second ID abnormality occurs, the abnormality notification is executed, and at least a part of the use of the game ball B1, the provision of the storage medium M, and the progress of the game may not be prohibited. It is good also as a structure which is not prohibited.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2113, that is, if the ID information received this time matches any ID information stored in the ID information storage area 164d, the process proceeds to step S2115. In step S2115, “1” is set to the confirmed flag in the ID information storage area 164d where the same ID information as the ID information received this time is stored. As a result, the payout side MPU 162 can specify that the ID information has been received from the game ball B1 having the ID information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, if the process in step S2105 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2108, or if the process in step S2115 is executed, the payout side MPU 162 determines in step S2116. It is determined whether or not the launch permission signal output toward the launch control device 65 is in the HI level state. If the firing permission signal is in the LOW level, the ID monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if the firing permission signal is in the HI level, the processes after step S2117 are executed. That is, when the firing operation device 36 is operated by the player in a situation where the remaining ball information is 1 or more and the launching of the game ball B1 is permitted based on that, the processing from step S2117 is executed.

  In step S2117, 1 is added to the value of the monitoring period counter provided in the payout side RWM 164. The monitoring period counter measures the monitoring period when the payout-side MPU 162 specifies whether or not all the specific number of pieces of ID information stored in the ID information storage area 164d have been received during the predetermined monitoring period. It is a counter used to

  In subsequent step S2118, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in all the confirmed flags in the ID information storage area 164d, so that all of the specific number of ID information stored in the ID information storage area 164d is determined. Is received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2118, all the confirmed flags are cleared to “0” in step S2119, and the monitoring period counter is cleared to “0” in step S2120, and then this ID monitoring process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2118, it is determined in step S2121 whether or not the value of the monitoring cycle counter is “60000”. The ID monitoring process is executed by a timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) activated at a cycle of 4 msec. Further, when the launch operation device 36 is operated by the player in a situation where the remaining ball information is 1 or more and the launch of the game ball B1 is permitted based on that, the process of step S2117 is executed each time the ID monitoring process is executed. Is done. Therefore, in step S2121, it is determined whether or not 240 seconds have elapsed as the monitoring period in the situation where the game ball B1 is being launched based on the launch operation by the player. Incidentally, the measurement of the monitoring period is interrupted when the launch of the game ball B1 based on the launch operation by the player is interrupted (that is, when the launch permission signal becomes LOW level), and the launch operation by the player When the launch of the game ball B1 based on is resumed (that is, when the launch permission signal becomes the HI level), the measurement is resumed from the value measured before the interruption.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2121, the ID monitoring process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2121, a part of the specific number of game balls B1 thrown into the pachinko machine 10 has flowed out of the pachinko machine 10, or balls pass through the game area or the game ball B1. Means clogged. In this case, in step S2122, after outputting the third ID abnormality command to the main MPU 152, the present ID monitoring process is terminated.

  When the main-side MPU 152 receives the third ID abnormality command, the main-side MPU 152 outputs a command corresponding to the third ID abnormality command to the sound emission control device 62, thereby executing abnormality notification corresponding to the third ID abnormality. Like that. An aspect of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, but an aspect in which the manager of the game hall can recognize that the third ID abnormality has occurred in at least one of the abnormality notification light emitting unit 53, the speaker device 37, and the symbol display device 46a. In this case, a configuration in which abnormality notification is executed can be considered. Further, in addition to or instead of the abnormality notification by the pachinko machine 10 itself, an abnormality occurrence signal corresponding to the occurrence of the third ID abnormality may be output to the gaming hall management computer.

  However, unlike the cases of the first ID abnormality and the second ID abnormality, in the case of the third ID abnormality, the subsequent processing is not stopped in the payout side MPU 162, and the timer interruption processing (FIG. 14) is also performed in the main side MPU 152. The setting for making an affirmative determination in step S406 is not performed. That is, in the case of the third ID abnormality, the process for proceeding with the game in the main MPU 152 is not stopped, and the process for using the game ball B1 and the storage medium M are ejected also in the payout MPU 162. The process to do is not stopped.

  When the third ID abnormality occurs, a part of the specific number of game balls B1 flows out of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, or a part of the game balls B1 stays in the game area or the passage route of the game balls B1. This is considered to be the case. Such an event is unlikely to occur due to cheating, and even if it occurs due to cheating, the disadvantage that the game hall suffers is smaller than in the case of the first ID abnormality or the second ID abnormality. It is done. Therefore, with regard to the third ID abnormality, emphasis is placed on the disadvantage of allowing a regular player to suspend the game, and the processing regarding the progress of the game, the use of the game ball B1 and the discharge of the storage medium M should not be interrupted. Yes. In addition, when a third ID abnormality occurs, a notification about the abnormality occurrence is executed, so it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to eliminate the third ID abnormality.

  The abnormal state can be canceled by operating at least one of the first erasing button 61b and the second erasing button 61c without requiring the power of the pachinko machine 10 to be turned on again. 10 may be required to be turned on again. Further, in the case of the third ID abnormality, in addition to the abnormality notification, at least a part of the use of the game ball B1, the provision of the storage medium M, and the progress of the game may be prohibited. It is good also as composition to do.

  As described above, when ID information cannot be received from the game ball B1 by the reader device 85 in a state where the game ball B1 is detected by the firing ball detection sensor 84, the abnormality process is executed. This makes it possible to deal with an irregular game ball that cannot transmit ID information when it is thrown into the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, when the ID information of the game ball B1 circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ID information storage area 164d and ID information different from the stored ID information is received, an abnormality process is executed. The This makes it possible to deal with a case where a non-regular game ball having no regular ID information is thrown into the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, the game balls B1 circulating in the pachinko machine 10 have different ID information, and these ID information is stored in the ID information storage area 164d. If all the ID information stored in the ID information storage area 164d cannot be received within a predetermined monitoring period, an abnormality process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to monitor whether or not a ball clogging has occurred in the passage route of the game ball B1, such as a game area, using reception of ID information.

  The reader device 85 is provided so as to receive ID information from the game ball B1 supplied on the launch rail 81. This makes it possible to monitor the game ball B1 during a normal game. Further, it is possible to detect an abnormality related to the reception of ID information at a timing before the abnormal game ball B1 is launched toward the game area. Further, in the configuration in which the reader device 85 is provided as described above, the game balls B1 circulating in the pachinko machine 10 have different ID information, and these ID information is stored in the ID information storage area 164d. Yes. This makes it possible to monitor the number of game balls B1 during a normal game.

<Remaining sphere handling process executed by main MPU 152>
Next, the remaining sphere handling process executed by the main MPU 152 will be described. Prior to the description of the remaining ball handling process, the confirmation process for the reservation notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The confirmation process for the hold notice is executed in step S702 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 20) in the main MPU 152.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a new acquisition of hold information has been performed in the hold information acquisition process in the immediately preceding step S701. When a negative determination is made in step S2201, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, in step S2202, the jackpot determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 is read out of the newly acquired hold information.

  In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, by referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning, In the case of the high probability mode, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning table for the high probability mode. In this case, the type of numerical information corresponding to the jackpot result set in the success table for the low probability mode is more than the type of numerical information corresponding to the jackpot result set in the success table for the high probability mode. Although there are few types, the former numerical information is all included in the latter numerical information. Therefore, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result in the low probability mode is a jackpot result even in the high probability mode.

  When the process of step S2204 is executed or when the process of step S2205 is executed, it is determined in step S2206 whether or not it corresponds to a big win. If a negative determination is made in step S2206, the confirmation process for this reservation notice is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2206, in step S2207, the type determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the newly acquired hold information.

  In the following step S2208, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to an opening / closing execution mode that is a high-frequency winning mode. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, as already described, as the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode are set so that the occurrence frequency of winning in the variable winning device 42 during the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. Frequency winning mode is set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), as the jackpot result, a low probability big hit result, a low winning high probability big hit result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set. The advantageous jackpot result triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode. Therefore, in step S2208, it is determined whether the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is either the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2208, the confirmation process for this reservation notice is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, after the occurrence flag corresponding to the area in which the newly acquired hold information is stored is set to “1” in step S2209, the confirmation process for the hold notice is made. Exit.

  For details on the occurrence flag, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the reserved storage area 154b of the main RWM 154 is provided with an execution area AE and first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4. In each of these areas, an occurrence flag is set in one-to-one correspondence with the area for storing the hold information. In addition, when starting a new game round, the hold information held in the first hold area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the hold information held in the second to fourth hold areas RE2 to RE4. Are shifted to the upper holding area. At this time, the data set in the generation flag is also shifted in accordance with the shift of the corresponding holding information. As described above, the occurrence flag is set to “1” when the corresponding hold information corresponds to the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is the high-frequency winning mode. In other words, it is possible to grasp whether or not the corresponding holding information corresponds to the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode by the occurrence flag.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the remaining sphere handling process. The remaining sphere handling process is executed in step S419 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in the main MPU 152.

  In the remaining sphere handling process, it is determined in step S2301 whether the frequency information is 1 or more, and in step S2302, it is determined whether the remaining sphere information is 10 or less. As described above, the frequency information and the remaining ball information are transmitted from the payout side MPU 162 to the main side MPU 152 by executing the processing in step S1017 of the game ball management process (FIG. 23) in the payout side MPU 162. Is done. Further, the main-side MPU 152 grasps the frequency information and the remaining sphere information in the sphere management state reception process in step S418 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301 or if a negative determination is made in step S2302, the remaining ball handling process is terminated as is, a negative determination is made in step S2301, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2302 Then, the process proceeds to step S2303. In other words, when the frequency information is “0” and the remaining sphere information is 10 or less which is a predetermined reference number, the process proceeds to step S2303.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the generation flag corresponding to any of the hold information. If the total occurrence flag is “0”, the remaining sphere handling process is terminated. If “1” is set in any of the generation flags, the winning notification command is output to the sound emission control device 62 in step S2304, and then the remaining ball handling process is terminated.

  By outputting the winning notification command, at least one of the speaker device 37 and the symbol display device 46a is the high-frequency winning mode after the end of the current game round or after the end of the game round corresponding to the hold information stored on hold. In such a manner, the player is able to recognize the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  For example, in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode after the end of the current game round, the symbol is displayed in the symbol display device 46a at the timing before the symbol variation display is started, in all symbol sequences. In a situation where the display is variably displayed, a situation where only a part of the symbol row is variably displayed, or after the timing when the reach variability display is started and before the reach variability display is terminated, "Please replenish." Is displayed and voice is output. In this case, in maintaining the degree of attention to the game through the prediction of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode occurs, after the timing when the reach variation display is started, as a kind of the reach effect or the reach effect and In addition, a configuration in which special notification is executed is preferable.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a specific number of game balls B1 circulate, and when the remaining ball information is not 1 or more, the game balls B1 cannot be launched based on the launch operation. In this case, in the situation where the frequency information is “0” and the remaining ball information is “0” or a small number, the player frequently inserts a banknote when the high-frequency winning mode open / close execution mode occurs. In addition, the ball supply button 142 is further operated to replenish the remaining ball information. Since the replenishment requires a predetermined period, the game ball B1 is released during this predetermined period. The opening / closing execution mode will proceed without being made. On the other hand, in the round game in the high-frequency winning mode, the upper limit time for opening the variable winning device 42 is set so as to allow the upper limit number of winnings, which is one end condition of the round game, as described above. If the game ball B1 is not fired for a predetermined period of time, the upper limit number of winnings may not be generated in a round game such as the first round. On the other hand, in the situation where the frequency information is “0” and the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number as described above, the game times corresponding to the on-hold information stored after the end of the current game times or on hold. In the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode after the end of the game, a special notification corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed to the player. As a result, the player can replenish the remaining ball information in advance before the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs, and the occurrence of the inconveniences described above can be prevented. .

  In addition, the timing at which the hold information is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode at a timing before the determination is made that the hold information is determined to be a game start target, specifically, the hold information is acquired. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special notification can be executed at an early stage, and for the player, the remaining ball information can be replenished with a margin before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the special notification is not executed when the hold information that is the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is stored. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the special notification is executed, and the possibility that the execution of the special notification impairs the original game performance is reduced.

  Further, when the frequency information is stored, the special notification is not executed regardless of the value of the remaining sphere information. If the frequency information is stored, it is possible to convert to the remaining ball information at an early stage. Low. Therefore, by not performing the special notification when the frequency information is stored, the possibility that the execution of the special notification impairs the original game performance is reduced.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the information on the number of usable game balls B1 is stored in the remaining ball information storage area 164b as the remaining ball information, the actual game ball B1 can be substituted with the remaining ball information, and the game hall The total number of game balls B1 at can be suppressed. Even if the game ball B1 flows down in the game area, the game ball B1 circulates in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the number of game balls B1 used in the pachinko machine 10 can be determined. It is possible to reduce the total number of game balls B1 in the hall.

  In such a configuration, the remaining ball information can be partially returned, so when the remaining ball information is used for purposes other than gaming, such as exchanging products in a game hall, several minutes according to the purpose of use. It becomes possible to use only. Thus, in the configuration in which the actual game ball B1 is substituted with the remaining ball information as described above, the remaining ball information can be used for exchanging products in the game hall. In particular, when the game ball B1 circulates in the pachinko machine 10, since the player cannot take out the game ball B1, the conventional exchange in the game hall in which the game ball B1 is exchanged for a product such as a drink. It becomes impossible to do. On the other hand, even if the game ball B1 is circulated in the pachinko machine 10 by allowing a part of the remaining ball information to be returned as described above, it is referred to as exchange for a product such as a drink. Traditional exchanges at the game hall are possible.

  Since the game ball B1 is configured to have the IC tag 181, it is possible to easily determine whether the game ball B1 is legitimate by reading the ID information from the game ball B1. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform management of game ball B1 suitably. Further, since the IC tag 181 is provided so as not to exist on the surface of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 is formed so that radio waves from the IC tag 181 can be transmitted to the outside, the IC tag 181 The IC tag 181 can be protected while the ID information can be read.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the reader device 85 is provided so that the area through which the game ball B1 passes becomes the detection range, and the payout side MPU 162 performs a monitoring process using the ID information received by the reader device 85. It is the composition which is done. Thereby, it becomes possible to monitor the game ball B1 using the ID information by the pachinko machine 10 itself.

  When hold information for winning a big hit is stored and the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number (10), a result display for the hold information is executed by the special figure display unit 47. Before, the corresponding notification is executed to the player. This makes it possible to supplement the remaining ball information in advance before the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the hold information.

  In the predetermined situation, even if the all return button 143 of the operation unit 141 is operated, the storage medium M in which all the remaining sphere information is written is not discharged. As a result, if all of the remaining ball information may be disadvantageous to the player, or if the information output becomes complicated, the player may operate the all return button 143. It can be invalidated.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for partially returning the remaining sphere information is different from that in the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below.

  FIG. 43A is a schematic diagram for explaining a configuration of an operation part for performing partial return. In the present embodiment, an operation panel unit 191 is provided instead of the operation unit 141 in the first embodiment. The operation panel unit 191 includes a frequency display area 192 for displaying frequency information, a remaining number display area 193 for displaying remaining sphere information, and a plurality of designated operation areas 194a to 194a for instructing partial return. 194d, a sphere supply operation area 195 for instructing supply of the sphere, and an all return operation area 196 for instructing the total return of the remaining sphere information are set. Among these, the designated operation areas 194a to 194d, the ball supply operation area 195, and the all return operation area 196 are touch panel types, and when these operation areas 194a to 196 are pressed, An operation generation signal corresponding to the operation areas 194a to 196 is output to the payout MPU 162, and the payout side MPU 162 can grasp which operation area 194a to 196 is operated based on the operation generation signal.

  In detail, the designated operation areas 194a to 194d have a predetermined number of game balls B1 to be partially returned in each designated operation area 194a to 194d, and the number of the game balls B1 is determined according to each designated operation area. It is displayed in each of the areas 194a to 194d. In addition, in each designated operation area 194a to 194d, information indicating what kind of merchandise is exchanged in the game hall for the number of corresponding partially returned game balls B1 is also displayed. Therefore, when the player wants to exchange a predetermined product in the game hall during the game, the player may press the designated operation areas 194a to 194d corresponding to the predetermined product. The payout control device 64 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC of the game hall, and if the pressing operation of the designated operation areas 194a to 194d is valid, a signal corresponding to the operation is output to the hall computer HC. As a result, the predetermined product is delivered to the player.

  Processing in the payout side MPU 162 for performing such partial return will be described. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing a management process for partial return in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether any of the designated operation areas 194a to 194d is operated. If none of the designated operation areas 194a to 194d is operated, this management process is terminated. If any one of the designated operation areas 194a to 194d is operated, the value of the remaining sphere information corresponding to the operation is grasped in step S2402. In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining sphere information grasped in the step S2402 is equal to or less than the value of the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, it is determined that the current operation is not valid, and the present management process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the current operation is valid. Then, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, a signal including the value of the remaining sphere information grasped in step S2402 and information for specifying the pachinko machine 10 is output to the hall computer HC.

  In the subsequent step S2405, the value obtained in step S2402 is subtracted from the value of the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b, and the subtraction result is overwritten in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b. Thereafter, in step S2406, the display content of the remaining number display area 193 is updated to the content corresponding to the value of the remaining sphere information after the processing of step S2405, and then this management processing is terminated.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the designated operation areas 194a to 194d are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with exchangeable products, so that the player can designate the designated operation areas 194a to 194a corresponding to the products to be exchanged. It is only necessary to operate 194d, and the operability is improved. Further, since the necessary remaining ball number information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the designated operation areas 194a to 194d, it is possible to output only the remaining ball number information necessary for the exchange of the product. Further, since the remaining ball information is output to the hall computer HC when the product is exchanged, the frequency with which the storage medium M is output can be suppressed.

  In addition, when any one of the designated operation areas 194a to 194d is operated, the value of the remaining sphere information corresponding to the designated operation area 194a corresponds to the operated designated operation areas 194a to 194d, instead of being output to the hall computer HC. The product identification information may be output to the hall computer HC.

  Further, when any one of the designated operation areas 194a to 194d is operated, the value of the remaining sphere information corresponding to the designated operation area 194a corresponds to the operated designated operation areas 194a to 194d instead of being output to the hall computer HC. The storage medium M in which the value of the remaining sphere information is written may be ejected from the management unit 131. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the storage medium M in which product identification information corresponding to the operated designated operation areas 194a to 194d is written is ejected from the management unit 131.

  Further, the type of product that can be instructed on the operation panel unit 191 and the remaining ball information corresponding to the product may be set in the game hall.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for partially returning the remaining sphere information is different from that in the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below.

  FIG. 44A is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for partial return. In this embodiment, the operation unit 141 in the first embodiment is not provided with a part of the operation part for return, but instead receives radio waves from the output device owned by the game hall manager. And an approval button 202 that is operated in order for the player to approve the content received by the receiving unit 201. The receiving unit 201 and the approval button 202 are electrically connected to the payout control device 64.

  In the present embodiment, when a part of the remaining ball information is exchanged for a predetermined product, the player tells the game hall manager that the remaining ball corresponding to the predetermined product. A purchase signal including information is output from the output device to the pachinko machine 10. The purchase signal is received by the receiving unit 201, and further, when the player operates the approval button 202, the remaining ball information is subtracted, and then a predetermined product is delivered to the player.

  Processing in the payout side MPU 162 for performing such partial return will be described. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing a management process for partial return in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the approval waiting state is set by determining whether or not “1” is set in the approval waiting flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. If not in the approval waiting state, in step S2502, the receiving unit 201 determines whether or not a purchase signal has been received from the output device owned by the manager of the game hall. If the purchase signal has not been received, the management process is terminated as it is. If a purchase signal has been received, the management process ends after setting the approval waiting state in step S2503.

  On the other hand, if it is in the approval waiting state, an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, and the flow proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not the approval button 202 is operated. In step S2505, it is determined whether or not the condition satisfaction signal received from the launch control device 65 is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in either step S2504 or step S2505, the management process is terminated as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in both step S2504 and step S2505, the approval waiting state is canceled in step S2506. In a succeeding step S2507, the value of the remaining sphere information included in the purchase signal is grasped. Thereafter, in step S2508, it is determined whether the value of the remaining sphere information grasped in step S2507 is equal to or less than the value of the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2508, it is determined that the current operation is not valid, and the present management process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2508, the current operation is valid. Then, the process proceeds to step S2509. In step S2509, the value obtained in step S2507 is subtracted from the value of the remaining sphere information stored in the remaining sphere information storage area 164b, and the subtraction result is overwritten on the remaining sphere information storage area 164b. Thereafter, in step S2510, the display content of the remaining number display unit 148 is updated to the content corresponding to the value of the remaining sphere information after the processing of step S2509, and then the management process is terminated.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, since a signal is output from the game hall side when exchanging with a product using a part of the remaining ball information, the storage medium M is necessary for the exchange. And not. Therefore, the frequency with which the storage medium M is output can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to perform subtraction of the remaining ball information when exchanging the commodity, using an operation on the game hall side as at least one condition.

  Further, even if the receiving unit 201 receives a purchase signal from the game hall side, the remaining ball information is not subtracted unless the approval button 202 is operated by the player. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the remaining ball information from being subtracted against the player's intention. Further, the operation of the approval button 202 is invalidated when the firing operation device 36 is not operated. This makes it difficult to perform unauthorized operations on the approval button 202.

  The approval operation for receiving the purchase signal may be configured to require the input of a password set in advance by the player. In this case, an unauthorized approval operation can be more reliably prevented.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, a synthetic resin is used as a base material and a game ball B1 having an IC tag 181 built therein is used. However, in the present embodiment, a metal ball such as a steel ball is used as an IC tag. What does not have 181 is used as game ball B2. With this change in configuration, the configuration for monitoring the number of game balls B2 circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described.

  FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration of the outlet 72 of the ball tray 71 and the vicinity thereof in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 45, also in the present embodiment, the game ball B2 collected by the discharge collecting unit 101 is supplied to the ball tray unit 71, and the game ball B2 collected by the return ball collecting unit 121 is supplied. Supplied. In this case, a communication shutter mechanism 211 is provided at the communication port 104 where both the discharge collection unit 101 and the return ball collection unit 121 communicate with each other at the most downstream portion.

  The communication shutter mechanism 211 is connected between the communication shutter member 212 and an allowable position where the communication shutter member 212 allows the game ball B2 to pass through the communication port 104 and a blocking position where the game ball B2 passes through the communication port 104. And a communication shutter drive unit 213 that is moved by The communication shutter drive unit 213 is electrically connected to the payout control device 64, and a drive signal is output from the payout control device 64 to the communication shutter drive unit 213, whereby the communication shutter member 212 is moved from the allowable position to the blocking position. Moving.

  When the communication shutter member 212 is arranged at the blocking position, at least the game ball B2 is blocked from being supplied from the return ball collecting unit 121 to the ball tray unit 71. In the present embodiment, the capacity of the return ball collecting unit 121 is set to a capacity that can accommodate all of the specific number of game balls B2 circulated in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to make all the specific number of game balls B2 stand by in the return ball collecting unit 121 so that the game ball B2 does not exist in the ball tray unit 71.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the number monitoring process executed to monitor the number of game balls B2 in the payout side MPU 162.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the number monitoring state is set by determining whether or not “1” is set in the number monitoring flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. The number monitoring state is a state in which processing for monitoring the number of game balls B2 is being executed.

  If not in the number monitoring state, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode has started. The ending period is a period that is started after all round games in the open / close execution mode are completed, and the symbol display device 46a is used for the player to recognize the display that the open / close execution mode has ended and the subsequent game state. Is displayed. In addition, during the ending period, the start of a new game round is prohibited.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the number monitoring process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603. In step S2603, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level. Thereby, even if the launch operation device 36 is fired by the player in a situation where the remaining ball information is 1 or more, the launch of the game ball B2 toward the game area is not executed. In the number monitoring state, the output state of the LOW level launch permission signal is maintained. Thereafter, after setting the number monitoring state in step S2604, the number monitoring process is terminated.

  When the number monitoring state is set and an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, it is determined in step S2605 whether or not “1” is set in the monitoring execution flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. It is determined whether or not it is in a monitoring execution state. The monitoring execution state is a state in which launch control for monitoring the number of game balls B2 is being executed.

  If it is not in the monitoring execution state, it is determined in step S2606 whether it is a predetermined timing of the ending period. The predetermined timing is set to the number monitoring state, and if the game ball B2 is being fired immediately before the output state of the launch permission signal is set to the LOW level, the game ball B2 is sent to the discharge collecting unit 101. The estimated maximum time until it returns to the ball tray 71 or longer than that is set as the timing that has elapsed since the start of the ending period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2606, the number monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the process proceeds to step S2607. In step S2607, the communication port 104 is closed. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the communication shutter drive unit 213 is started to place the communication shutter member 212 at the blocking position, thereby preventing the game ball B2 from passing through the communication port 104. In the subsequent step S2608, the monitoring signal output state is set to the HI level, and in step S2609, the monitoring execution state is set.

  The monitoring signal is a signal output from the payout-side MPU 162 toward the launch control device 65, and in order to monitor the number of the game balls B2 even in a situation where the launch operation device 36 is not operated, The HI level is set when the ball feeding device 86 and the game ball launching mechanism 34 are driven and controlled to launch B2 toward the return ball collecting unit 121. Thereby, the launch control device 65 executes launch control for number monitoring.

  The content of the number control launch control in the launch control device 65 is the same as the content of the ID registration launch control process (FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. That is, the supply of the game ball B2 onto the launch rail 81 by the ball feeding device 86 and the supply of the game ball B2 with a shorter cycle than when the game ball B2 is launched based on the launch operation of the launch operation device 36. A launching operation by the game ball launching mechanism 34 for the game ball B2 is performed. Further, the firing strength at this time is uniquely determined regardless of the amount of operation of the operation handle 36b, and reaches the guide rail at a position closer to the game area than the end on the firing destination side of the firing rail 81. It is set so that the game ball B2 starts to fall at a position where it does not, and the game ball B2 is collected by the return ball collection unit 121. Accordingly, when the number is monitored, the game ball B2 is launched toward the return ball collection unit 121 at a shorter cycle than when the game ball B2 is launched toward the game area.

  When the monitoring execution state is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S2605 and the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, 1 is added to the value of the monitoring cycle counter provided in the payout side RWM 164. The monitoring cycle counter is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the launch control for monitoring the number of game balls B2. In a succeeding step S2611, a launch management process at the time of monitoring the number is executed. In this process, the same process as the launch management process (FIG. 35) at the time of ID registration in the first embodiment is executed. That is, when the front door 22 is opened, the firing control for monitoring the number is interrupted, and when the front door 22 is closed, a process for restarting the firing control is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S2612, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the monitoring detection flag provided in the payout side RWM 164. The monitoring detection flag is a flag provided in place of the registration detection flag in the first embodiment, and the game ball B2 newly supplied on the launch rail 81 in the monitoring execution state is a launch ball detection sensor. This flag is set to “1” when detected by 84.

  If “1” is set in the monitoring detection flag, in step S2613, the value of the monitoring counter provided in the payout RWM 164 is incremented by one. The monitoring counter is a counter used for measuring the number of game balls B2 detected by the shot ball detection sensor 84 in the monitoring execution state.

  In the following step S2614, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitoring counter is greater than or equal to a specific number. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the monitoring counter is 101 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S2614, the number monitoring process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2614, it means that a non-regular game ball different from the regular game ball B2 is added in the pachinko machine 10. In this case, after outputting a multisphere abnormality command to the main MPU 152 in step S2615, the infinite loop is continued as it is.

  When the main-side MPU 152 receives a multi-ball abnormal command, the main-side MPU 152 performs a setting to make an affirmative determination in step S406 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), thereby stopping the progress of the subsequent game and emitting the sound. By outputting a command corresponding to the multisphere abnormality command to the control device 62, abnormality notification corresponding to the multisphere abnormality is executed. Although the mode of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, the manager of the game hall can recognize that a multi-ball abnormality has occurred in at least one of the abnormality notification light emitting unit 53, the speaker device 37, and the symbol display device 46a. In this case, a configuration in which abnormality notification is executed can be considered. Further, in addition to or instead of the abnormality notification by the pachinko machine 10 itself, an abnormality occurrence signal corresponding to the occurrence of a multi-ball abnormality may be output to the gaming hall management computer.

  As a case where a non-regular game ball is added to the pachinko machine 10, for example, an illegal act of throwing a game ball smaller than the regular game ball B2 into the pachinko machine 10 is assumed. When such a small game ball is inserted, it becomes easier for a winning to occur than the regular game ball B2. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the used game balls are circulated without being discharged, so that a small irregular game ball is repeatedly used in the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by executing the processing as described above, it is possible to prohibit the use of the game ball B2 and the provision of the storage medium M when the illegal act is performed. In addition, through the execution of the abnormality notification, it is possible to notify the game hall manager that a multi-ball abnormality has occurred.

  The abnormal state is canceled by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while operating both the first erase button 61b and the second erase button 61c after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The pachinko machine 10 may be released only by turning on the power again. The pachinko machine 10 may be released by operating at least one of the first erasing button 61b and the second erasing button 61c without requiring the power to be turned on again. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2612, it is determined in step S2616 whether the value of the monitoring period counter is 6000 or more. The number monitoring process is executed by a timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) activated at a cycle of 4 msec. In the monitoring execution state, the process of step S2610 is executed every time the number monitoring process is executed. Therefore, in step S2616, it is determined whether or not 24 sec which is the number monitoring period has elapsed since the monitoring execution state was set.

  Here, when the number of game balls B2 is monitored, the game balls B2 are fired at a period of 0.2 sec, and 100 pachinko machines 10 are charged as a specific number into the pachinko machine 10. Accordingly, the number monitoring period is set as a time longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball B2 and the specific number at the time of number monitoring.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2616, the number monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2616, the process proceeds to step S2617. In step S2617, both the number monitoring state and the monitoring execution state are canceled. Thereafter, in step S2618, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitoring counter is less than 100.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2618, the number monitoring process is terminated as it is. In this case, it means that there is no abnormality in the number of game balls B2 in the current number monitoring. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2618, a part of the specific number of game balls B2 thrown into the pachinko machine 10 has flowed out of the pachinko machine 10, or the passage area of the game area or game ball B2 It means that the ball is clogged. In this case, in step S2619, after outputting a small ball abnormality command to the main MPU 152, the number monitoring process ends.

  When the main-side MPU 152 receives a low-sphere abnormality command, the main-side MPU 152 outputs a command corresponding to the low-sphere abnormality command to the sound emission control device 62, thereby executing abnormality notification corresponding to the low-sphere abnormality. Like that. An aspect of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, but an aspect in which the manager of the game hall can recognize that a small ball abnormality has occurred in at least one of the abnormality notification light emitting unit 53, the speaker device 37, and the symbol display device 46a. In this case, a configuration in which abnormality notification is executed can be considered. Further, in addition to or instead of the abnormality notification by the pachinko machine 10 itself, an abnormality occurrence signal corresponding to occurrence of a small ball abnormality may be output to the gaming hall management computer.

  However, unlike the case of the multisphere abnormality, in the case of the small ball abnormality, the subsequent processing is not stopped in the payout side MPU 162, and the main side MPU 152 also affirms in step S406 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 14). No setting is made to make a determination. In other words, in the case of a small ball abnormality, the process for proceeding with the game in the main side MPU 152 is not stopped, and the process for using the game ball B2 in the payout side MPU 162 and the storage medium M are discharged. The process to do is not stopped.

  When a small ball abnormality occurs, a part of a specific number of game balls B2 flows out of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, or a part of the game balls B2 stays in the game area or the passage route of the game balls B2. This is considered to be the case. Such an event is unlikely to occur due to fraud, and even if it occurs due to fraud, it is considered that the disadvantage that the game hall suffers is smaller than in the case of a multi-ball anomaly. Therefore, with regard to the small ball abnormality, emphasis is placed on the disadvantage of allowing a regular player to suspend the game, and the processing of the game progress, the use of the game ball B2 and the discharge of the storage medium M should not be interrupted. Yes. In addition, even when a small ball abnormality occurs, the notification of the abnormality occurrence is executed, so it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to resolve the small ball abnormality.

  The abnormal state can be canceled by operating at least one of the first erasing button 61b and the second erasing button 61c without requiring the power of the pachinko machine 10 to be turned on again. 10 may be required to be turned on again.

  Here, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 when the number of game balls B2 is monitored will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  47A shows whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is executed, FIG. 47B shows whether or not the ending period is executed, and FIG. 47C shows a normal firing operation based on the operation of the firing operation device 36. FIG. 47 (d) shows a state of operation of the communication shutter member 212, and FIG. 47 (e) shows a state of a firing operation when the number monitoring is executed.

  In the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the ending period starts at the timing of t41. Since the number monitoring state is set at this timing, the firing permission signal output from the payout side MPU 162 is set to the LOW level regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining sphere information or the operation of the firing operation device 36. The normal launch operation is not performed.

  Thereafter, the communication shutter member 212 is arranged at the blocking position at a timing t42 when the standby time Ta until the passage of the communication port 104 is blocked. Accordingly, the inflow of the game ball B2 from the discharge collection unit 101 and the return ball collection unit 121 to the ball tray unit 71 is prevented. In this case, the standby time Ta is the longest time assumed as the time required until all the game balls B2 launched toward the game area immediately before being set to the number monitoring state are accommodated in the ball tray portion 71. It is set as the above time. Therefore, if there is no abnormality in the circulation and the number of game balls B2, it is possible to start monitoring the number of game balls B2 in a state where all the specific number of game balls B2 are accommodated in the ball tray portion 71.

  At the timing of t42 when the communication shutter member 212 is arranged at the blocking position, a firing operation at the time of monitoring the number is started. As a result, the game ball B <b> 2 is launched toward the return ball collecting unit 121 at a cycle shorter than normal. Thereafter, the monitoring execution state is canceled at the timing of t43, which is the timing when the number monitoring period Tb has elapsed from the timing of t42. Along with this, the communication shutter member 212 is disposed at the allowable position, and the emission operation at the time of monitoring the number is stopped, and the emission operation at the normal time becomes possible. In addition, at the timing of t43, the ending period ends and the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, whether or not the number of game balls B2 circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is a specific number is monitored, and when it is larger or smaller than the specific number Abnormal processing is executed. This makes it possible to deal with a case where an unauthorized gaming ball is illegally inserted into the pachinko machine 10 or when an authorized gaming ball B2 flows out of the pachinko machine 10.

  When the number of game balls B2 is monitored, the launch of the game balls B2 based on the operation of the launch operation device 36 is prohibited. Thereby, it is possible to monitor the number of game balls B2 without considering the influence of the launch of the game ball B2 based on the operation of the launch operation device 36. Further, since the number of monitoring is performed during the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable even if the launch of the game ball B2 is prohibited.

  In monitoring the number of game balls B2, the game ball B2 is moved so as to pass through a predetermined route, and the moving game balls B2 are sequentially detected by the firing ball detection sensor 84. Thereby, it becomes possible to monitor the number of game balls B2 by using one shot ball detection sensor 84 arranged at a predetermined position.

  When monitoring the number of game balls B <b> 2, the communication shutter mechanism 211 prevents passage of the communication port 104. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the game ball B2 once counted in monitoring the number passes through a predetermined path and is detected by the launch ball detection sensor 84. Monitoring can be suitably performed.

  When the number of game balls B2 is monitored, the predetermined path through which the game balls B2 pass does not include a game area, and the movement distance is shorter than when flowing down the game area. In addition, the firing cycle of the game ball B2 at this time is shorter than the normal firing cycle. As a result, the time required to monitor the number of game balls B2 can be shortened. In particular, when the number is monitored, the game ball B2 is fired toward the return ball collecting unit 121, so that the existing configuration can be used in order to shorten the number monitoring work. Become.

  When the communication shutter member 212 is arranged at the blocking position, the flow of the game ball B2 from the return ball collecting unit 121 to the ball tray unit 71 is blocked, and the discharge collecting unit 101 to the ball plate unit 71 is blocked. It may be provided so as not to block the inflow of the game ball B2. In this case, the waiting time Ta can be shortened or made unnecessary, and when the number monitoring is executed during the ending period, the ending period can be shortened.

  The number monitoring may be performed in the opening period instead of the ending period, or may be performed in a period other than the opening / closing execution mode. The period other than the opening / closing execution mode may be configured such that the regular game ball B2 is prohibited from being fired regularly (for example, every 30 minutes) and the number monitoring is executed, and the demonstration display is started on the symbol display device 46a. In this case, the number monitoring may be executed.

  Further, there are an area for storing the hold information acquired when a winning is made to the upper working port 43 and an area for storing the holding information acquired when a winning is made to the lower working port 44. Even if the former hold information is acquired first, if the latter hold information is acquired, the hold information is preferentially digested, and the latter hold information is used for lottery processing. In the configuration where the player's hold information is more advantageous to the player than the case where the former hold information is the target of the lottery process, the game is played in the high frequency support mode in which the winning frequency to the lower operation port 44 is improved. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of spheres B2 is not monitored.

  Further, when monitoring the number of game balls B2, when the game ball B2 is launched based on the operation of the launch operation device 36, the game ball B2 may be moved so as to pass through a route that does not pass. Good. However, after the number of game balls B2 is monitored, it is necessary to return the game ball B2 to the ball tray 71, and to move the game ball B2 above the ball tray 71 or from the ball tray 71. In order to move the game ball B2 existing below to the ball tray 71, it is necessary to provide a device for transporting the game ball B2 upward. Specifically, when monitoring the number of game balls B2, the game ball B2 is moved below the ball tray 71, and the game ball B2 is detected by a ball detection sensor provided in the lower area. A configuration for counting the number is conceivable. In this case, the downward movement from the ball tray 71 is performed by the weight of the game ball B2, while when the game ball B2 existing below is moved to the ball tray 71, it is moved upward by the transport device. The structure to be made can be considered.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the pachinko machine 10, since the ball cover portion 71 is provided with the plate cover 75, the player cannot touch the game ball B 2 stored in the ball plate portion 71. The point that the game ball B2 cannot be replenished without permission, the point that the game ball B2 is launched based on the launch operation within the range of the remaining ball information, the point that the remaining ball information is provided to the player as the storage medium M, etc. Although it is the same as that of the said 1st Embodiment, the game ball B2 does not circulate in the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball B2 which flowed down the game area | region is discharged | emitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the island installation of a game hall. Note that the game ball B2 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a metal ball such as a steel ball and does not have the IC tag 181.

  With the change of the configuration, in this embodiment, a back pack unit 221 is provided on the rear side of the main body base 21. FIG. 48 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 for explaining the configuration of the back pack unit 221.

  The back pack unit 221 is configured by integrating a back pack 222 and a game ball payout mechanism 223. The back pack 222 is integrally formed of synthetic resin such as ABS resin. The backpack 222 is provided with a payout mechanism 223. Specifically, a tank 224 opened upward is provided at the uppermost portion of the back pack 222, and the game balls B2 supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 224. A tank rail 225 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 224, and a case rail 226 extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 225. A payout device 227 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 226, and is driven and controlled by the payout control device 64 so that a necessary number of game balls B <b> 2 are supplied to the ball tray portion 71 as appropriate.

  Although illustration is omitted, on the surface facing the support base body 31 side in the launch control device 65, the game ball B2 that has flowed down the game area and led to the back side of the game board 33 is collected and collected. A passage portion for discharging the game ball B2 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed.

  Next, a configuration for making the specific number of game balls B2 stored in the ball tray 71 constant will be described. FIG. 49A is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration of the outlet 72 of the ball tray 71 and the vicinity thereof in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (a), the communication port 104 leading to the outlet 72 of the ball tray portion 71 communicates with the most downstream portion of the game ball passage continuing from the payout device 227, and the return ball collecting portion. The most downstream part of 121 is connected. The communication port 104 is provided with a ball supply detection sensor 228 for detecting the game ball B2 passing through the communication port 104. The ball supply detection sensor 228 is electrically connected to the payout control device 64, and the payout control device 64 executes drive control of the payout device 227 while using the detection result of the ball supply detection sensor 228.

  The ball supply detection sensor 228 detects not only the game ball B2 paid out from the payout device 227 and supplied to the ball tray unit 71, but also the game ball B2 collected by the return ball collection unit 121. The return ball recovery unit 121 is provided with a return ball detection sensor 124 as in the first embodiment. The detection result of the ball supply detection sensor 228 is used to make a certain number of game balls B2 stored in the ball tray 71 constant, whereas the detection result of the return ball detection sensor 124 is Similar to the first embodiment, it is used to adjust the remaining sphere information.

  Next, a process executed by the payout side MPU 162 in order to make the specific number of game balls B2 stored in the ball tray unit 71 constant will be described. FIG. 49 (b) is a flowchart showing a process for stabilizing the stored ball.

  In step S2701, it is determined whether or not one game ball B2 has been newly launched by determining whether or not the normal detection flag is set to “1”. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, 1 is subtracted from the value of the stored ball counter provided in the payout side RWM 164 in step S2702. The stored ball counter is a counter for measuring the number of game balls B2 stored in the ball tray unit 71.

  In the following step S2703, it is determined whether or not the value of the stored ball counter after the subtraction is less than a specific number, that is, whether or not it is less than 100. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2703, a ball supply instruction signal is output to the payout device 227 in step S2704. As a result, the game balls B <b> 2 that are less than the specific number are paid out from the payout device 227 toward the ball tray portion 71.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2701, a negative determination is made in step S2703, or if the process of step S2704 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2705. In step S2705, it is determined whether or not one game ball B2 is detected by the ball supply detection sensor 228. If a negative determination is made in step S2705, the present stabilization process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2705, the value of the storage ball counter is incremented by 1 in step S2706, and then the present stabilization process. Exit.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the game ball B2 that flows down the game area and is discharged from the game area is discharged from the pachinko machine 10 while being stored in the ball tray 71. The payout device 227 is driven and controlled so that the number of items becomes a specific number. As a result, the necessity for monitoring whether or not a small-sized non-regular game ball is thrown into the pachinko machine 10 is reduced, and even if the game ball B2 flows out of the pachinko machine 10, inconvenience is less likely to occur. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily manage the number of game balls B2.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the game ball B3 circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is formed using a material (specifically, metal) that is not attracted by a magnet such as brass. Note that the IC tag 181 is not embedded in the game ball B3.

  In the said structure, when the conventional steel ball is thrown in as a non-regular game ball, the structure which removes the said steel ball from the circulation path of game ball B3 is provided. FIG. 50A is a schematic diagram showing a configuration for removing an irregular game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the discharge collecting unit 101 is provided with a rotating drum 231 with a magnet attached to the outer periphery, and flows down toward the ball tray unit 71. The game ball B3 passes through a position adjacent to the outer peripheral portion of the rotary drum 231. The drive motor 232 of the rotary drum 231 is electrically connected to the payout control device 64, and is configured such that the rotary drum 231 always rotates at a constant speed when operating power is supplied to the payout MPU 162. Yes.

  The non-regular game ball attached to the outer peripheral portion of the rotary drum 231 is guided to the removal passage portion 233 as the rotation drum 231 rotates, and comes off the rotation drum 231 and flows down the removal passage portion 233. Become. The removal passage portion 233 is provided with an illegal ball detection sensor 234, and it is specified in the payout control device 64 that the game ball has passed through the removal passage portion 233.

  The downstream portion of the removal passage portion 233 communicates with a removal ball stopping portion (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the illegal sphere detection process executed by the payout MPU 162.

  In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the illegal sphere detection sensor 234 is ON. If the illegal sphere detection sensor 234 is not ON, the present illegal sphere detection process is terminated as it is. If the illegal sphere detection sensor 234 is ON, the illegal sphere detection process is terminated after outputting the abnormal sphere abnormality command to the main MPU 152 in step S2802.

  When the main MPU 152 receives an illegal sphere abnormality command, the main MPU 152 outputs a command corresponding to the illegal sphere abnormality command to the sound emission control device 62, thereby executing abnormality notification corresponding to the abnormal sphere abnormality. Like that. Although the mode of the abnormality notification is arbitrary, the manager of the game hall can recognize that an abnormal ball abnormality has occurred in at least one of the abnormality notification light emitting unit 53, the speaker device 37, and the symbol display device 46a. In this case, a configuration in which abnormality notification is executed can be considered. Further, in addition to or instead of the abnormality notification by the pachinko machine 10 itself, an abnormality occurrence signal corresponding to the occurrence of an illegal ball abnormality may be output to the gaming hall management computer.

  The abnormal state can be canceled by operating at least one of the first erasing button 61b and the second erasing button 61c without requiring the power of the pachinko machine 10 to be turned on again. 10 may be required to be turned on again. In addition, when an illegal ball abnormality occurs, the processing regarding the progress of the game, the use of the game ball B3, and the discharge of the storage medium M may be stopped.

  By using the game ball B3 that is not attracted to the magnet as described above, it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the magnet. In addition, even if an illegal ball attracted by the magnet is inserted, by providing the rotating drum 231, it can be discharged from the circulation path of the game ball B 3 and an abnormality notification is executed. Thus, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall that the illegal ball has been inserted.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of another embodiment described below may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) In the modification shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the dish forming unit 55 covers a ball dish forming body (not shown) that partitions the ball dish part 71 and the ball dish part 71 from above. A dish cover 75 and a peripheral cover 241 for covering the periphery of the ball dish forming body are provided. An operation unit 141 is provided on the peripheral cover 241. In the above configuration, the ball dish forming body and the dish cover 75 are provided on the main body base 21, whereas the peripheral cover 241 is provided on the front door 22. According to the said structure, when exchanging the front door 22 in the case of a model change, it becomes possible to change the operation unit 141 according to it.

  (2) In the modification shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the ball pan portion 71 formed by bulging forward from the window panel 52 as in the above embodiments is not provided. . Instead, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), a storage passage 245 extending in the lateral direction is formed inside the pachinko machine 10 so as to be folded back multiple times on the lateral end side of the pachinko machine 10. Has been. Thereby, even if the ball tray 71 does not exist, a specific number of game balls can be circulated in the pachinko machine 10. Further, the operation unit 141 is provided at a position below the window panel 52 and above the launch operation device 36 on the surface facing the front of the front door 22. In the configuration in which the storage passage 245 has a plurality of passage regions extending in the horizontal direction, the plurality of passage regions may be arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction instead of in the vertical direction.

  (3) When paying attention to the ease of monitoring the game ball B1 by using the game ball B1 having the IC tag 181, the game ball B1 flows down the game area and is discharged from the game area. You may utilize for the structure by which the game ball B1 made | formed is discharged | emitted from the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Further, as a gaming medium of a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused, a medium having an IC tag 181 may be used. For example, in the case of a slot machine, an IC tag 181 is attached to a medal, and ID information is read by the reader device 85 when it is detected that a medal is present in a predetermined area on the passage route that continues from the medal slot. In addition, when the ID information cannot be read or when the unregistered ID information is read, the abnormal process is executed. In this case, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the inserted game medium is legitimate.

  (4) In the first embodiment, instead of a configuration that enables output of ID information by the IC tag 181, an ID is provided by adding a barcode or QR code (registered trademark) to the surface of the game ball B 1. It is good also as a structure which enables the output of information. In this case, whether or not the game ball B1 circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is legitimate by the manager of the game hall reading ID information using a bar code or QR code reader. It becomes possible to grasp.

  (5) The position for acquiring the ID information from the game ball B1 is not limited to the position in the first embodiment. For example, the ID information is received from the game ball B1 guided to the back side of the game board 33. Thus, the reader device 85 may be provided. Specifically, a configuration in which the reader device 85 is provided in the discharge collection unit 101 is conceivable. Further, the reader device 85 may be provided so as to receive the ID information from the game balls B1 aligned in a line in the alignment region 74 of the ball tray portion 71. Even in these cases, a detection sensor for detecting the presence of the game ball B1 in the predetermined area is provided, and when the game ball B1 is detected by the detection sensor, the reader device 85 provides the ID information. A configuration for receiving is preferable.

  (6) As the weight piece 184 for increasing the weight of the game ball B1, ceramic may be used instead of metal. In this case, by selecting a material that transmits radio waves as the ceramic, it is possible to increase the weight of the game ball B1 while facilitating communication with the IC tag 181.

  Further, instead of the resin material, a ceramic that can transmit radio waves may be used as the base material of the game ball B1. In this case, a weight piece whose weight per unit volume is larger than that of the base material may or may not be provided in the game ball B1.

  (7) In the first embodiment, the ID information of a specific number of game balls B1 circulating in one pachinko machine 10 may be all in common. Even in this case, it is preferable to execute the abnormality process when there is a game ball B1 that cannot receive the ID information, and the abnormality process is executed when ID information different from the common ID information is received. It is preferable to do. In this case, when an irregular game ball is inserted, it is possible to cope with it.

  (8) In a configuration in which a specific number of game balls B1 have different ID information, the ID information may not be registered in the pachinko machine 10. Even in this case, it is possible to monitor the introduction of an unauthorized game ball by monitoring whether or not there is a game ball B1 that cannot receive ID information. Further, by grasping the number of types of ID information received within the monitoring period, it is possible to monitor the number of game balls B1 circulating in the pachinko machine 10.

  (9) The ID information is read by the reader device 85 from the game ball B1 moving in the pachinko machine 10, and the ID information is input to the pachinko machine 10 by an external operation instead of the configuration for registering the ID information. By doing so, the ID information may be registered. For example, when a terminal unit for inputting data is provided in the pachinko machine 10 and a specific number of game balls B1 are set in the pachinko machine 10, ID information corresponding to the specific number of game balls B1 through the terminal unit. A configuration for writing

  (10) When the first ID abnormality is identified and when the second ID abnormality is identified, before the game ball B1 that is the identification target is launched toward the game area, A configuration may be adopted in which launching of the game ball B1 is prohibited.

  (11) When performing at least one of registration of ID information and monitoring of ID information, when the game ball B1 is launched based on the operation of the launch operation device 36, the game ball passes along a route that does not pass It is good also as a structure which moves B1. However, after registering ID information and monitoring ID information, it is necessary to return the game ball B1 to the ball tray portion 71, and to move the game ball B1 above the ball tray portion 71, or In order to move the game ball B1 existing below 71 to the ball tray 71, it is necessary to provide a device for transporting the game ball B1 upward. Specifically, when performing at least one of registration of ID information and monitoring of ID information, the game ball B1 is moved below the ball tray 71, and the ID is received by the reader device 85 provided in the lower area. A configuration for reading information is conceivable. In this case, the downward movement from the ball tray portion 71 is performed by the weight of the game ball B1. On the other hand, when the game ball B1 existing below is moved to the ball tray portion 71, it is moved upward by the transport device. The structure to be made can be considered.

  (12) A configuration in which a part of the remaining sphere information can be returned even in a situation where the launch operation device 36 is being operated may be employed. In this case, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom with respect to the operation timing for exchanging merchandise. However, in this configuration, a part return operation and a game ball launch operation can be performed at the same time, so in fact, even though the remaining ball information is already “0”, either There is a risk that the operation may be determined to be effective. Therefore, when the remaining ball information is more than a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) than the number of game balls specified by the operation for partial return, even if the launch operation is being performed, it is for partial return. It is preferable to adopt a configuration that enables the above operations.

  (13) In the first embodiment, when a partial return operation is performed, the storage medium M is not ejected, but is set by the player as in the second embodiment. The remaining ball information may be output to the hall computer of the game hall.

  (14) On hold information corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, as a target for which special notification is executed when the frequency information is “0” and the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number It is good also as a structure including the case where the game time of this is performed and the case where the said hold information is hold-stored. That is, when the frequency information is “0” and the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number, the special notification is executed before the result is displayed in the game information of the hold information that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure to be.

  (15) Even if the frequency information is 1 or more, if the remaining sphere information is less than the reference number, a special notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to prompt the player to convert the frequency information into the remaining ball information before the opening / closing execution mode is started.

  (16) The special notification that allows the player to recognize that the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number may be executed only in the game times that trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the timing at which the special notification is started may be a timing before the symbol display on the symbol display device 46a is started, or may be a situation in which symbols are variably displayed in all symbol rows. Of course, only a part of the symbol sequence may be displayed in a variable manner. However, in maintaining the degree of attention to the game through the prediction of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode will occur, at the timing after the reach variation display is started and before the reach variation display is accommodated. A configuration in which special notification is executed as a kind of the reach effect or separately from the reach effect is preferable.

  Further, in the configuration in which the premium effect that is executed only when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs is set as the effect in the symbol display device 46a, the premium effect may be executed as a special notification. In this case, it is not necessary to prepare image data dedicated to special notification, and it is possible to provide special notification as an effect to the player.

  (17) The storage and update of the frequency information may be executed by the main RWM 154 and the main MPU 152 instead of the configuration executed by the payout RWM 164 and the payout MPU 162. The management RWM 174 and the management side It is good also as a structure performed by MPU172. In addition, the cash input port 132, the medium input port 133, and the medium discharge port 134 of the management unit 131 may be provided in the main body base 21 or the front door 22, and the payout control board 161 may perform the function of the management control board 171.

  (18) In the main process (FIG. 11) when the main MPU 152 is turned on, the second erase button is used when at least one of the case where the power failure flag is not set to “1” and the checksum is abnormal Even if 61c is not operated, an initialization command may be output to the payout MPU 162.

  (19) The payout side MPU 162 also sets “1” to the power failure flag when the power is shut off, and the checksum is calculated and stored, and the power failure flag is displayed in the main process (FIG. 12) at the time of power activation. It is also possible to determine whether or not “1” is set and whether or not the checksum is normal. In this case, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” in the main process, or if the checksum is abnormal, the payout MPU 162 may receive the initialization command from the main MPU 152. , The payout side RWM 164 is initialized.

  (20) The launch ball detection sensor 84 may be provided so as to detect a game ball that has reached the entrance portion of the game area and has not flowed backward through the guide rail. In this case, the game ball detected by the shot ball detection sensor 84 surely flows down the game area, so that even if a return ball is generated, it is not necessary to execute the remaining ball information addition process. Accordingly, the return ball detection sensor 124 can be omitted.

  However, in this case, since the subtraction process of the remaining ball information is executed at the timing when the game ball reaches the entrance portion of the game area, the next game ball is not processed at the timing when the subtraction process of one game ball is not completed. There is concern about being fired. Therefore, it is preferable to adjust the launch period of the game ball so that such an event does not occur.

  (21) When a winning occurs when the front door 22 is opened, a configuration may be adopted in which an abnormal state in which an abnormality notification is performed is set. In this case, it is possible to cope with an act of bringing a game ball to any of the entrances and directly entering it.

(22) It is good also as a structure which can output frequency information and residual ball | bowl information from the pachinko machine 10 to the external apparatus provided in game halls etc. other than the management unit 131. In this case, as an electrical connection location between the external device and the pachinko machine 10, a configuration using a connection location with the management unit 131 may be used, or a configuration in which a dedicated connection location is provided. With this configuration, even when a connection failure with the management unit 131 or a failure of the management unit 131 occurs, it is possible to eject the storage medium M in which the frequency information and the remaining sphere information are written. .

(23) The area above the lower end of the window panel 52 in the front door 22 and the game board 33 may be integrally removable. In this case, since only the unit needs to be replaced when changing the model, the replacement work can be facilitated.

  (24) The management unit 131 may be provided with a reader device that can receive cash information from a general-purpose storage medium.

  (25) The first erasing button 61b and the second erasing button 61c are not provided in the main control device 61, but instead of the game board 33, the support base body 31 such as the payout control device 64 and the firing control device 65. It is good also as a structure provided in the apparatus mounted in.

  (26) The winning number monitoring process may be executed. Specifically, when there are more game balls that have entered the entrance area provided in the game area than the number of game balls that have been launched toward the game area, the abnormality notification and the progress of the game are stopped. A configuration for executing such processing is conceivable. In addition, when the discharge collecting unit 101 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball, and the number of game balls detected by the detection sensor is larger than the number of game balls launched toward the game area In addition, a configuration for executing processing such as abnormality notification and stop of progress of the game is conceivable.

  (27) Data on the payout rate of game balls with respect to the number of shot balls in the normal game state is stored in advance in the pachinko machine 10, and the payout rate actually measured in the normal game state is higher than the base payout rate. If it is high, processing such as abnormality notification or stop of progress of the game may be executed. In this case, since the payout rate changes depending on the adjustment level of the nail 49b in the game area, it is preferable that the base payout rate can be adjusted in the game hall.

  (28) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which two power supply devices are provided, and may have a configuration in which only one power supply device is provided, and another power supply device is provided for the management unit 131. It is good also as composition which has.

  In a configuration in which only one power supply device is provided, power is supplied from one power supply device to all the various devices including the main control device 61, the payout control device 64, and the management unit 131. In this case, the power supply device may be mounted on the back surface of the game board 33 or may be mounted on the back surface of the support base body 31.

  In addition, power is supplied from one power supply device to various devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 including the main control device 61 and the payout control device 64, while the management unit 131 is routed through a different route from the power supply device. In the configuration in which power is supplied, a power supply device that supplies power to the management unit 131 may be provided in the pachinko machine 10, or may be provided in the management unit 131. It is good also as a structure by which electric power is supplied from the power supply device for supplying electric power to a hall computer.

  (29) The firing operation device 36 may be provided on the front door 22. In this case, in view of facilitating the opening operation of the front door 22, the touch sensor 36c, the variable resistor 36d, and the stop switch 36e are preferably provided on the front door 22 side together with the operation base 36a and the operation handle 36b. .

  (30) Display control based on the command output from the main control device 61 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 63 is controlled by the sound emission control device 62 based on the command output from the main control device 61 The device 63 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 62. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 62 and the display control device 63 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main controller 61, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 61. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 61 to the sound emission control device 62 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 62 to the display control device 63 are also arbitrary.

  (31) When an abnormality is detected in the main MPU 152, a command to that effect may be output to the payout MPU 162 to prohibit the launch of game balls.

  (32) The first to sixth embodiments may be combined with each other. For example, the configuration described in the second embodiment and the configuration described in the fourth embodiment may be used. The configuration described in the third embodiment and the configuration described in the fifth embodiment. It is good also as a structure which has.

  (33) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific area of the special device, or a game ball in the specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by the insertion of medals and the operation of the start lever, and the stop button is operated. The present invention also relates to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window after the reel stops. Can be applied.

  For example, a configuration is conceivable in which all medals awarded to a player can be stored and held as virtual medals. Further, in the configuration in which the panel portion is provided below the operation region where the start lever and the stop button are provided, the operation unit 141 in the first embodiment and the operation in the second embodiment are provided on the panel portion. A panel unit 191 may be provided.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  (34) A modified example of the configuration for introducing a specific number of game balls B1 of a new set into the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 showing an enlarged part for explaining the modified example.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the discharge collecting unit 101 is provided with a charging case 251. The charging case 251 is provided so as to fill a part of the discharging recovery member 102 that has been removed, and is detachable from the discharging recovery member 102. A plurality of flanges 254 are integrally formed in the charging case 251, and the charging case 251 is screwed to the discharge collecting member 102 by using the flange 254.

  The game ball collection passage provided in the discharge collection unit 101 is formed by using the input case 251, and the game balls collected and circulated by the discharge collection unit 101 are stored in the input case 251. Will pass. In this case, a first shutter 252 and a second shutter 253 are provided at both ends of the collection case 251 in the passage direction of the collection passage. The first shutter 252 and the second shutter 253 are provided so as to be displaceable between a passage permission position and a passage prevention position, and when both shutters 252 and 253 are disposed at the passage permission position. In the case where the inflow of the game ball into the input case 251 and the outflow of the game ball from the input case 251 are allowed, and the first shutter 252 is disposed at the passage blocking position, the input into the input case 251 is allowed. Inflow of game balls is blocked, and when the second shutter 253 is disposed at the passage blocking position, discharge of game balls from the throwing case 251 is blocked. The displacement of the shutters 252 and 253 is performed by directly manually operating the shutters 252 and 253, but may be configured to be electrically driven.

  The throwing case 251 is formed so as to be able to accommodate a specific number (100, for example, any specific number) of game balls B1, and in the state where a specific number of game balls B1 are stored. When the shutter 253 is disposed from the passage prevention position to the passage permission position, the specific number of game balls B1 are discharged from the throwing case 251 by their own weight.

  In the above configuration, when a specific number of game balls B1 are charged, a charging case 251 in which a specific number of game balls B1 are stored is installed at an installation location formed on the discharge collecting member 102. After fixing, the second shutter 253 is displaced from the passage blocking position to the passage allowable position. As a result, the charging case 251 communicates with the downstream area of the collecting passage in the collecting passage 251 and the game ball B1 accommodated in the charging case 251 flows down to the downstream side by its own weight. With this operation, a specific number of game balls B1 can be inserted. Further, by displacing the first shutter 252 from the passage blocking position to the passage allowing position, the charging case 251 is communicated with the region upstream of the charging case 251 in the collection passage, and the charging case 251 is in communication. Will function as a part of the recovery passageway. The game ball discharged from the game area flows into the collection passage from the upstream side of the charging case 251 in the collection passage.

  Further, when part of the specific number of game balls B1 disappears and a specific number of game balls B1 are newly inserted, the passage of the second shutter 253 of the input case 251 that is currently installed is first blocked. The game ball B1 is circulated in the state of being placed at the position, and all the old set-side game balls B1 are accommodated in the throwing case 251. Thereafter, after the first shutter 252 is disposed at the passage blocking position, the input case 251 is removed, and a new input case 251 is installed. Then, as described above, by placing the shutters 252 and 253 in the passage allowable position for the new throwing case 251, a new set-side game ball B 1 is thrown.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve workability when a specific number of game balls B1 are first inserted or when a specific number of game balls B1 are newly input. In addition, since the charging case 251 is used as it is as a collection passage after being installed, it is possible to set a charging point on the circulation path of the game ball B1, and to suppress the complication of the configuration, It is possible to smoothly circulate the game ball B1.

  In this modification, the ball polishing mechanism 111 is not provided. However, the ball polishing mechanism 111 may be provided. For example, the ball polishing mechanism 111 may be provided on the charging case 251 side.

  (35) A modification of the configuration for preventing the game ball B1 from flowing out of the pachinko machine 10 when the front door 22 is opened will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 showing an enlarged part for explaining the modification. In FIG. 54A, a part of the front door 22 is broken.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, the support base body 31 is provided with an opening prevention member 261. Similarly, the opening prevention member 261 is driven by an opening prevention driving unit 262 provided on the support base body 31 so that it can be displaced between the opening allowance position and the opening prevention position. In the case of being arranged, the front door 22 can be opened and closed by retreating to a position where it does not interfere with the front door 22, and in the case of being arranged in the opening prevention position, a part is on the front door 22 side. The front door 22 cannot be opened or closed by being disposed at a position that protrudes and interferes with the front door 22. The opening prevention driving unit 262 is electrically connected to the main control device 61, and when the driving signal is output from the main control device 61, the opening prevention driving unit 262 is displaced from the opening allowable position to the opening prevention position, and the drive signal is output. Is stopped to return from the opening prevention position to the opening allowable position.

  Next, the door opening monitoring process that is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the main MPU 152 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54 (b).

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the door is not open by checking the state of the flag provided on the main RWM 154. The door unopenable state is a state in which a drive signal is output to the opening prevention drive unit 262, and in this case, opening and closing of the front door 22 is blocked. The state that is not in the door unopenable state is a state in which a drive signal is not output to the opening prevention drive unit 262. In this case, the front door is opened by performing an unlocking operation for opening the front door 22. 22 can be opened and closed.

  If the door is not open, it is determined in step S2902 whether or not a game ball is being fired by the game ball launching mechanism 34. Specifically, it is determined by using the detection result of the shot ball detection sensor 84 whether or not a game ball is actually being shot toward the game area. However, in step S2902, it may be configured to determine whether or not a game ball is being fired. In this case, what is necessary is just to make it the structure which determines whether the regular launch operation is performed with respect to the launch operation apparatus 36. FIG. This also applies to step S2904 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2902, the main monitoring process is terminated as is, and if an affirmative determination is made, the door is not opened in step S2903, and then the main monitoring process is ended. Even if an unlocking operation for opening the front door 22 is performed, the front door 22 cannot be opened by being set to the door unopenable state. In addition, since the launch of the game ball is prohibited in the situation where the front door 22 is opened, the door is not set in the door unopenable state in the situation where the front door 22 is opened.

  If the door cannot be opened (step S2901: YES), it is determined in step S2904 whether or not a game ball is being fired, as in step S2902. If an affirmative determination is made, the monitoring counter value provided in the main RWM 154 is cleared to “0” in step S2905, and then the monitoring process is terminated. The monitoring counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 152 the timing for releasing the door unopenable state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2904, 1 is added to the value of the monitoring counter in step S2906. In a succeeding step S2907, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitoring counter after the addition is a release value. This release value indicates that the state in which the game ball is not being fired after the door open disabled state is set, and the discharge from the game area is completed from the timing when the game ball launch mechanism 34 performs the launch operation. In the case where it continues for a time longer than the longest time until it is done, it is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2907. If a negative determination is made in step S2907, the monitoring process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2907, the door unopenable state is canceled in step S2908, and the value of the monitoring counter is cleared to “0”, and then this monitoring process is terminated.

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball is being launched toward the game area, and when the game ball is flowing down the game area, it is impossible to open the front door 22. . Thereby, when opening the front door 22, possibility that the game ball B1 will flow out of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 can be opened regardless of whether the game ball is being launched toward the game area or when the game ball is flowing down the game area. This eliminates the need to interrupt the launching of the game ball when checking the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 while the player is playing the game.

  In addition, when the opening prevention member 261 is disposed at the opening prevention position, the unlocking operation for opening the front door 22 is enabled, and the opening of the front door 22 is prevented instead of opening. When it is arranged at the blocking position, the opening blocking member 261 may be configured to interfere with the locking device so that the unlocking operation itself for opening the front door 22 is disabled.

  (36) In the configuration of (35) above, when the ID monitoring process (FIG. 39) is normal for the first embodiment, the number monitoring process (FIG. 46) is normal for the fourth embodiment. In some cases, the opening of the front door 22 is prevented, and when the monitoring process is abnormal, the opening of the front door 22 may be permitted. In this case, in the situation where the game balls B1 and B2 are normally circulated in the pachinko machine 10, the opening of the front door 22 is prevented, so that the game balls B1 and B2 just accidentally flow out from the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the act of intentionally extracting the game balls B1 and B2 from the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented.

  (37) A modified example of a configuration in which a special notification is executed when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode when the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number will be described with reference to FIGS. To do.

  FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the confirmation process for holding notice in this modification, and FIG. 55B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the holding storage area 154b in this modification.

  First, the reserved storage area 154b will be described with reference to FIG. Similar to the first embodiment, the reserved storage area 154b includes an execution area AE and first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4. In each of these areas, a combination of a determined flag, a jackpot flag, and a generation flag is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the area for storing the hold information.

  Of these flags, as in the first embodiment, the occurrence flag indicates whether or not the corresponding holding information corresponds to the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode. This is a flag for enabling identification by the main MPU 152. The determined flag is a flag for enabling the main MPU 152 to specify whether or not the confirmation processing in step S3003 and later to be described later has been executed for the corresponding hold information. The jackpot flag allows the main MPU 152 to specify whether or not the corresponding holding information corresponds to either the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode or the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the low-frequency winning mode. Flag. At the start of a new game round, the holding information held in the first holding area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the holding information held in the second to fourth holding areas RE2 to RE4 is respectively changed. In this shift, the data set in the determined flag, the big hit flag, and the occurrence flag are also shifted to the upper side in accordance with the corresponding hold information shift. In addition, when this shift is completed, the area that is the shift target among the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 and is the lowest side (the fourth reservation area RE4 side) before the shift. As for, the determined flag, the jackpot flag and the occurrence flag are cleared to “0”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55 (a), a confirmation process for holding notice will be described.

  First, in step S3001, among the areas where the hold information in the execution area AE of the hold storage area 154b and the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4 is stored, there is an area in which “1” is not set in the determined flag. Determine if it exists. Note that the hold information stored in the execution area AE is the hold information that is the execution target of the game times, and the hold information stored in the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4. This is pending information that has not yet been executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3001, the present confirmation process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3002. In step S3002, whether or not there is an area in which “1” is set in the jackpot flag among the areas storing the hold information in the execution area AE and the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4. Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the confirmation process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In other words, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result already exists in the areas where the hold information in the execution area AE and the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4 is stored, step S3003 and the subsequent steps are performed. Even if there is pending information for which the confirmation process has not been executed, the confirmation process is not executed for the pending information. In the present modification, as in the first embodiment, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode as the success / failure lottery mode. When a jackpot result is generated in the hold information, the result of the lottery determination for the predetermined hold information may be different. On the other hand, as described above, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result already exists, the confirmation processing after step S3003 is not executed for the hold information that is the start target of the game round thereafter. By doing so, when a jackpot result is generated, it becomes unnecessary to invalidate or re-confirm the confirmation processing result so far.

  In step S3003, “1” is set to the determined flag corresponding to the area to be subjected to the current confirmation process among the execution area AE and the first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4. In this case, if there are a plurality of areas in which the hold information is stored but the determined flag is not set to “1”, the areas from the upper side (execution area AE → first hold area RE1 →.・ ・）, The target of confirmation processing.

  In subsequent step S3004, the jackpot determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information that is the execution target of the current confirmation process. In a succeeding step S3005, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, by referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the numerical information obtained from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning, If it is in the high probability mode, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning table for the high probability mode. In this case, the type of numerical information corresponding to the jackpot result set in the success table for the low probability mode is more than the type of numerical information corresponding to the jackpot result set in the success table for the high probability mode. There are few types, and the former numerical information is not included in the latter numerical information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the former numerical information may be included in the latter numerical information.

  When the process of step S3006 is executed or when the process of step S3007 is executed, it is determined in step S3008 whether or not it corresponds to a big win. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3008, in step S3009, “1” is set in the jackpot flag corresponding to the area to be subjected to the current confirmation process among the execution area AE and the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4. "Is set. In the subsequent step S3010, the type determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the hold information that is the execution target of the current confirmation process.

  In a succeeding step S3011, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to an opening / closing execution mode that is a high-frequency winning mode. Note that the types of jackpot results are the same as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 41B). Therefore, in step S3011, it is determined whether the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3011, in step S3012, the occurrence flag corresponding to the area that is the target of the current confirmation process among the execution area AE and the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 is set to “1”. "Is set.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3008, a confirmation process for outreach is executed in step S3013. In the confirmation process for outreach, whether the information for outlier reach determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 among the hold information subjected to the execution of the present confirmation process corresponds to the occurrence of outreach. Determine whether or not.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3011, the process of step S3012 is executed, or if the process of step S3013 is executed, a hold command selection process is executed in step S3014. In the selection process, a hold command corresponding to the processing results of steps S3008 to S3013 is read from the main ROM 153. In step S3015, the read hold command is output to the sound emission control device 62, and then the present confirmation process is terminated.

  However, in the processes in step S3014 and step S3015, when the hold information that is the target of the current confirmation process is the hold information stored in the execution area AE, the hold command is not selected and output. In other words, the hold information stored in the execution area AE can be set with the data of the determined flag, the jackpot flag, and the occurrence flag when it becomes a target of processing after step S3003, but the output of the hold command Not an opportunity. On the other hand, for the first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4, when the processing after step S3003 is performed, the determination flag, jackpot flag, and occurrence flag data can be set and the output of the hold command can be performed. It can be an opportunity. Note that hold information that is not a jackpot result and is not a missed reach does not trigger the output of the hold command, but even the hold information may be configured to trigger the output of the hold command. In addition, the hold command includes information indicating in which of the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4 the hold information that is the trigger for the output is stored.

  As described above, the main MPU 152 periodically executes confirmation processing for hold notice, and if there is hold information in which “1” is not set in the determined flag, it already corresponds to the jackpot result. On the condition that the held information does not exist, it is determined whether or not the held information corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, the type determination of the jackpot result is further performed. If the jackpot result is not supported, a confirmation process for outreach is executed. Then, a hold command corresponding to the result of the confirmation processing is output to the sound emission control device 62. Further, since the confirmation process is executed for one piece of hold information for one execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the hold for which the determined flag is “0” is temporarily assumed. When there are a plurality of pieces of information, the confirmation process is completed for all of the hold information when the timer interrupt process for the same number of times as the number of the hold information is completed. However, since the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 4 msec, the number of hold information whose determined flag is “0” is the maximum number of hold information that can be stored in the hold storage area 154b (specifically, Even if it is the same number as 5), the time required for the above confirmation processing for all of the hold information is equal to or shorter than the shortest duration of one game time. Furthermore, in each game round, a variable display of symbols is performed in a plurality of (for example, three) symbol rows set in the symbol display device 46a, and thereafter, a stationary display of symbols is performed in each symbol row. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the symbol is terminated. However, the time required for the confirmation process for all of the hold information is at least one symbol row after the game is started. It is less than the shortest time required for the symbol stop display to start.

  Even in this modified example, the remaining sphere handling process (FIG. 42) is executed as in the first embodiment. That is, in the situation where the frequency information is “0” and the remaining ball information is equal to or less than the reference number (for example, “10”), the occurrence flag in any of the execution area AE and the first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4 is set. When “1” is set, a notice command is output from the main MPU 152 to the sound emission control device 62 as in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56, the hold notice process executed by the sound emission control device 62 will be described. The pending notice process is periodically executed in the sound emission control device 62 at a relatively short period (for example, a period of 2 msec).

  In step S3101, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command are received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, game effect production setting processing is executed in step S3102. In the setting process, information on the duration of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command, and information on the result of the game times determination process and the distribution determination process is specified from the contents of the type command. Then, an effect pattern for game times corresponding one-to-one with these identification results is identified. In this case, the effect pattern for the game times includes the contents of the presence / absence of execution of various effects and the contents of the types of effects determined to be executed. For example, the symbol display device 46a includes contents indicating whether or not a reach effect is to be performed, and includes the effect contents when a reach effect is performed. The reach production includes normal reach and super reach, and multiple types of production are set with different expectations of the jackpot result when the production occurs, and as a kind of reach production, the jackpot result and Premium effects that occur only when

  The sound emission control device 62 executes light emission control and sound output control in the current game time according to the contents of the effect set in the setting process in step S3102. In addition, the sound emission control device 62 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the setting process in step S <b> 3102 to the display control device 63. In the display control device 63, display control in the current game round is executed on the symbol display device 46a in accordance with the effect contents shown in the variation pattern command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3101, or after executing the process of step S3102, it is determined in step S3103 whether or not a pending notice command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, it is determined in step S3104 whether or not the hold notice command received this time is a command corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode, and in step S3105 the hold received this time. It is determined whether the notice command is a command corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode. As a result, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, a pending notice lottery process corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode is executed in step S3106. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3105, the process proceeds to step S3107. Thus, if the hold notice lottery process corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode is executed and a negative determination is made in both step S3104 and step S3105, the hold notice lottery process corresponding to the miss reach is executed in step S3108. To do.

  The hold notice means that the display corresponding to the contents of the hold information stored in the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold storage area 154b is more than the game times triggered by the hold information. It is an effect performed at the previous timing. Specifically, an individual display area corresponding to the maximum number of reserved information (number of first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4) is set on the display surface of the symbol display device 46a as the effect. Of these individual display areas, the number of the hold information is clearly indicated by performing individual display in the number of the individual display areas corresponding to the number of the hold information stored in the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4. In such a configuration, the reservation display is performed by setting the individual display mode in the individual display area to a mode corresponding to the content of the hold information (see, for example, FIGS. 57B and 57C). As an aspect of this hold notice, when executed, the first effect (golden individual display) that confirms that the hold information corresponding to the individual display becomes a jackpot result when the game information is started. The second effect (the probability of a jackpot result being less than 100%) is the second effect (red individual display) and the third effect (the green color is the next most likely to be a jackpot result) Individual display) and a fourth effect (blue individual display) with the lowest probability of a jackpot result are set. It should be noted that the types of effects of the hold notice are not limited to four types, but may be two types, three types, or five or more types.

  Here, the main MPU 152 outputs a hold acquisition command to the sound emission control device 62 when the hold information is newly acquired, and performs a sound emission control of the hold digest command when the game round is newly started. Output to the device 62. The sound emission control device 62 increases the number of individual displays performed in the individual display area when a hold acquisition command is received in other processing in step S3112 described later. In this case, the mode of the individual display is basically the mode of the fourth effect, and is selected when any one of the first effect to the third effect is selected as the execution of the hold notice. Individual display is performed. In addition, when the hold information is newly acquired in the situation where there is no hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the hold command is output immediately after the hold acquisition command is output. In the case of increasing, the individual display is started in a manner corresponding to the result of the pending notice lottery process described later. In addition, the voice light emission control device 62 reduces the number of individual displays performed in the individual display area when a pending digest command is received in other processing in step S3112 described later. In this case, with respect to the individual display which is one of the first to third effects, the order of the hold information that is the start target of the game times is changed (that is, the hold information is on the higher side). The display position is changed as it is shifted. That is, when holding information is stored in the first holding area RE1, individual display is performed in the first individual display area, and when holding information is stored in the second holding area RE2, the second individual is displayed. When individual display is performed in the display area and the hold information is stored in the third hold area RE3, the individual display is performed in the third individual display area, and the hold information is stored in the fourth hold area RE4. In this case, the individual display is performed in the fourth individual display area, and the first to fourth individual display areas are the first individual display area → the second individual display area → the third individual display area → the fourth individual display area. In the configuration in which the display areas are arranged in the horizontal direction in order, the hold information is displayed in the first to fourth individual display areas as the hold information is shifted in the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4. 1st stage to 3rd stage Individual display of any of the aspects of the is shifted to the higher side.

  Returning to the description of the hold notice process (FIG. 56), the hold notice lottery processes in steps S3106 to S3108 have different probabilities that the hold notice will be executed, and the probability of winning the execution is determined by the high-frequency winning mode. Is set so that the hold notice lottery process corresponding to is the highest and the hold notice lottery process corresponding to the miss reach is the lowest. Further, in each of the hold notice lottery processes, the types of effects that are easily selected when the hold notice is won are different. Specifically, in the pending notice lottery process corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, all of the first effect to the fourth effect are selected, but the selection probability so that the probability of selecting the first effect is the highest. Is set. Further, in the pending notice lottery process corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode, all of the second effect to the fourth effect are selected, but the selection probability is set so that the probability of selecting the second effect is the highest. ing. Further, in the pending notice lottery process corresponding to the miss reach, the second effect to the fourth effect are selected, but the selection probability is set so that the probability that the fourth effect is selected is the highest.

  After executing any one of steps S3106 to S3108, in step S3109, a hold notice effect setting process is executed. In the setting process, a command for holding advance notice corresponding to the content of the effect set in any of step S3106 to step S3108 is output to the display control device 63. In addition, the command includes information indicating in which of the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 the hold information that is the trigger for the output. As a result, the hold notice is started in the individual display area corresponding to the area where the hold information that triggered the output of the hold notice command is stored. However, when the fourth effect is selected as the mode of the hold notice, the individual display is performed in the same mode as the mode in which the individual display is simply increased in response to the reception of the hold acquisition command.

  Here, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the individual display in the individual display area is once erased (that is, the individual display area is erased) regardless of whether the high frequency winning mode or the low frequency winning mode is selected. The display of the individual display area is resumed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In this case, in the confirmation process for hold notice in the main MPU 152 (FIG. 55), as already described, if hold information corresponding to the jackpot result already exists, the hold information acquired thereafter is stored. On the other hand, after executing the opening / closing execution mode for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result without executing the check process after step S3003, the check process after step S3003 is executed for the unchecked hold information. In this configuration, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the time until the display of the individual display area is resumed is the maximum number (specifically, five) of hold information that can be stored in the hold storage area 154b. Thus, the confirmation processing after step S3003 is executed, and for all of them, the time required for completing the setting of the hold notice in the sound emission control device 62 and the display control device 63 is set. Therefore, when resuming the display of the individual display area, the display is resumed in a state that takes into account the content of the pending notice.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3103, or after the processing in step S3109 is executed, it is determined in step S3110 whether a hit notice command has been received. If the winning notice command has not been received, in step S3112 other processes are executed, and then the pending notice process is terminated. If the winning notice command has been received, in step S3111 the effect content changing process is executed, and in step S3112 the other process is executed, and then the pending notice process is terminated.

  The effect content changing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S3201, it is determined whether or not the hit notice command received this time corresponds to the hold information stored in any of the first to fourth hold areas RE1 to RE4. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, the first change process is executed in step S3202, and then the effect content change process ends.

  In the first change process, as shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) and FIG. 57 (b-2), it corresponds to the hold information that is displayed in the individual display area and becomes the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode. The mode of the individual display is changed to the first effect having the highest expectation level resulting in the jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 57 (b-1) and FIG. 57 (b-2), the individual display mode is set in the situation where the individual display is performed in the second presentation mode in the second individual display area. It changes to the aspect of the 1st production. In addition, when it is already a 1st production, the state is maintained. As a result, the player grasps that the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs at an early timing, and therefore can promptly prompt the player to replenish the remaining ball information. Moreover, since the change of the mode of the individual display is performed regardless of the increase timing or the decrease timing of the individual display, it is unexpected for the player and the degree of attention is increased. Furthermore, as the display mode for prompting the replenishment of the remaining sphere information is also used as the effect mode of the hold notice, not only the data amount is reduced, but also the replenishment of the remaining sphere information as a part of the performance Can be encouraged. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the change of the mode of the individual display based on reception of a hit notice command is performed at the increase timing or decrease timing of an individual display.

  Returning to the description of the change process of the effect content (FIG. 57A), if a negative determination is made in step S3201, that is, the hit notice command received this time corresponds to the hold information stored in the execution area AE. In this case, after the second change process is executed in step S3203, the effect content change process is terminated.

  In the second change process, during the game turn that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, an effect is executed that enables the player to be urged to supplement the remaining ball information. Thus, the process for partially changing the production pattern already determined as the production during the game is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (c-1), although the execution of the premium effect is not selected for the variation pattern determined when the game turn is started, FIG. As shown in -2), a premium effect is executed. Thereby, the player can prompt the player to replenish the remaining ball information in order to grasp that the player enters the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode after the game round is completed. Become. In addition, since the premium effect is also used as a display mode for prompting the supplementation of the remaining ball information, not only the data amount is reduced, but also the player is prompted to supplement the remaining ball information as part of the effect. Is possible.

  Here, the premium effect that is executed based on the reception of the hit announcement command is executed in the executable period that is originally set as the executable period of the premium effect that is the execution target. For example, if a premium effect that is executed during reach display is used, even if the hit notice command is received at a timing before the reach display is started, the premium effect is performed after the start of reach display. The premium effect is executed within the range of the executable period set in advance. However, the premium effect that is executed based on the reception of the hit notice command is executed within a range in which the duration of the game times determined at the start of the corresponding game times is not changed. Therefore, when a premium effect includes a moving image effect executed over a predetermined time and an additional effect by causing a predetermined character to appear while another moving image effect is being executed. In this case, the additional effect is selected as the premium effect that is executed based on the reception of the hit notice command. By selecting the additional effect in this way, the degree of freedom is increased with respect to the execution timing of the premium effect that is executed based on the reception of the winning notice command. If the duration of the game times determined at the start of the game times is not changed, the moving image effect may be selected as a premium effect that is executed based on reception of the winning notice command.

  In addition, as premium effects that can be executed based on the reception of the hit announcement command, there are executable periods during game play, such as before reach display, after reach display, and after the start of stop display of symbols in all symbol sequences. When there is a different premium effect, the premium notice is included in the executable period, or the executable period exists after the reception timing. It is preferable that the premium effect in which the executable period closest to the performed timing is set is selected as the execution target. Thereby, it becomes possible to promptly replenish the remaining sphere information. In this case, when there are a plurality of premium effects in which an executable period exists at or after the reception timing of the winning notice command, each premium effect may be executed. Thereby, the opportunity for the player to confirm the premium effect is increased, and the opportunity for prompting the supplement of the remaining ball information is increased.

  In addition, although the hit notice command can be output from the main MPU 152 even during the open / close execution mode, in this case, the sound emission control device 62 and the display control device 63 do not perform any processing corresponding thereto. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and notification that prompts the replenishment of the remaining sphere information may be performed as in the first embodiment.

  Further, the hold information stored in the execution area AE may be configured not to be the output target of the hit notice command.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the 1st effect is not set as an effect of a hold notice. In this case, as an effect mode of the hold notice, there is no configuration in which there is no effect that is determined to be a jackpot result. In this configuration, in order to prompt the replenishment of the remaining ball information using the effect of the hold notice, when the hit notice command is received, the sound emission control device 62 determines the jackpot result among the effect modes of the hold notice. What is necessary is just to set it as the structure which changes the production | presentation aspect of a reservation notice to the aspect with the highest expectation degree.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure where the premium effect is not set as the effect for game times. In this case, as an effect mode for the game times, there is a configuration in which there is no effect that is determined to be a jackpot result. In this configuration, in order to encourage the supplementation of the remaining ball information using the effect for the game times, the voice light emission control device 62 is an effect mode for the game times when the hit notice command is received. It is good also as a structure that the production | presentation aspect with the highest expectation degree which becomes a jackpot result is performed among the production | presentation aspects executable with respect to reception of the winning notification command.

  Regardless of whether or not there is an effect that confirms that the jackpot result will exist as an effect for the hold notice or an effect for the game times, the remaining ball is used by using the effect of the hold notice or the effect for the game times. In a case where information supplementation is urged, a configuration in which an aspect with a high expectation level resulting in a jackpot result may be selected.

  Further, in the sound emission control device 62, instead of a configuration that executes an effect that has the highest expectation level that results in a jackpot when receiving a hit announcement command, an expectation that results in a jackpot result over the already determined contents of the effect It is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation of a high side. Even in this case, it is possible to prompt the supplement of the remaining sphere information.

  Further, in the sound emission control device 62, as the contents of the effect to be executed when the winning notice command is received, the effect type is determined as the jackpot result for the effect type that has already been determined to be executed by lottery. It is good also as a structure which makes it the aspect which becomes fixed, or makes it the aspect of the side with the high expectation degree which becomes a jackpot result. In this case, for example, in the case where execution of a production type for displaying a predetermined character (such as a school of fish) has been decided, a lottery result with a blue color as a base color of the predetermined character is obtained. The structure which changes to the red which is the side with the high expectation degree to become, and the structure which changes to the gold color which is determined to be a jackpot result. Moreover, instead of the said structure, while performing the effect type different from the effect type already determined by lottery as the content of the effect performed when the hit notice command is received, It is good also as a structure which makes an aspect into the aspect which determines that it will be a jackpot result, or the aspect of the side with the high expectation level which becomes a jackpot result. In this case, for example, when execution of an effect type for displaying a specific character (such as bubbles) is determined, the effect type is changed to an effect type for displaying a predetermined character (such as a school of fish) instead of the specific character. A configuration is mentioned.

  Further, when the first effect is executed as an effect of the holding notice in order to promote the supplementation of the remaining ball information, the first effect is obtained only by the individual display corresponding to the hold information that becomes a trigger for switching to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode. In addition to the change of the content of the individual display corresponding to the hold information, the first effect is also executed in the individual display of other hold information, or the other display of the hold information other than that It is good also as a structure which changes the aspect of the above to the content of the side with higher expectation than the aspect until then. However, in order to make it easier for the player to recognize when there is a possibility of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, individual display of hold information that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the individual display of the hold information that is later in the digestion order is changed.

  In addition, when notifying that the remaining ball information should be replenished, as an effect during the game times executed before the game times for the hold information that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode Although it is not an effect that the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is confirmed, an effect with a high expectation degree of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode may be executed. In this case, it is good also as a structure where the production with the high expectation degree is continuously executed in each game time prior to the game time for the hold information that becomes the transition opportunity, each of these game times and the corresponding game times. It is good also as a structure by which the production with the said high expectation degree is continuously performed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure adjusted so that an effect performed continuously may have a high expectation degree, so that the game times of the order of the back may be continuous.

  (38) A collision member such as a nail 49b that regulates the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area does not need to adjust the flow direction of the game ball and the winning frequency with the front door 22 open. It is good also as a structure provided in.

  For example, if the nail 49b provided in the game area is made of synthetic resin, ceramic, or hard metal, it is impossible to adjust the angle and shape of the nail 49b by applying external force to the nail 49b. It is good also as composition which becomes or becomes difficult to perform. According to this configuration, even if the front door 22 is opened, the adjustment in the flow direction and the adjustment of the winning frequency are impossible or difficult to perform, so the adjustment act is substantially not performed and the front door 22 is opened. Occurrence of the event that the game ball spills down at this time is suppressed.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can provide a drive means with respect to each collision member, such as the nail 49b, or a predetermined combination unit, and can adjust the angle and shape of a collision member by electric drive. In this case, since it is possible to adjust the flow direction and the winning frequency without opening the front door 22, it is unlikely that the front door 22 will be opened during the adjustment. Occurrence of an event that the game ball spills down when the front door 22 is opened is suppressed.

  (39) A ball smaller than the regular game ball can pass through the circulation path of the game ball such as the discharge collecting unit 101 to prevent the illegal use of the illegal ball smaller than the regular game ball. You may form the opening which cannot pass a sphere. In this case, since the small illegal sphere is excluded from the circulation path through the opening, it is suppressed that the illegal sphere continues to circulate. In addition, an illegal sphere detection sensor may be provided to detect a sphere that has passed through the opening. In this case, it is possible to specify in the pachinko machine 10 that a small illegal ball was present, and for example, it is possible to execute processing such as notification in the pachinko machine 10 itself or external output to the hall computer of the game hall. .

  (40) In order to prevent the illegal use of a larger illegal ball than a regular game ball, an opening that prevents a ball larger than the regular game ball from passing through is formed in the circulation path of the game ball such as the discharge collecting unit 101. May be. As a result, when a large illegal ball is thrown into the pachinko machine 10, the ball is clogged at the opening, and it becomes impossible to continue the game, thereby preventing the circulation of the large illegal ball. Is possible. In addition, an illegal sphere detection sensor may be provided to detect a sphere staying in the opening. In this case, it is possible to identify in the pachinko machine 10 that a large illegal ball was present, and for example, it is possible to execute processing such as notification in the pachinko machine 10 itself or external output to the hall computer of the game hall. .

  (41) The outer frame 11 may be configured to be common among all manufacturers of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the outer frame 11 may not be included in the pachinko machine 10 but may be deferred to the island facility, or the pachinko machine 10 may be included.

  Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration, the management unit 131 may be configured to be common among all manufacturers of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the management unit 131 may not be included in the pachinko machine 10 but may be deferred to the island facility, or may be included in the pachinko machine 10. Even if the management unit 131 is configured to be installed on the island facility, the management unit 131 may be configured to be supplied with operating power from the pachinko machine 10 and supplied with operating power from the game hall side. It is good also as a structure.

  Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration, the support base body 31 (excluding the game board 33) may be configured to be common among all manufacturers of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the support base 31 may not be included in the pachinko machine 10 but may be deferred to the island facility, or may be included in the pachinko machine 10. Further, in this configuration, since the combination of the front door 22 and the game board 33 is a different part among manufacturers, these integrated objects are supported by the support base body 31 in a state where the game board 33 is locked to the front door 22. It is good also as a structure which can be mounted in.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which replaces with said each structure and is common among all the manufacturers except the game board 33. FIG. In this case, other than the game board 33 may be deferred to the island facility.

  (42) The device for detecting the game ball B1 supplied on the launch rail 81 is not limited to the configuration in which both the launch ball detection sensor 84 and the reader device 85 are provided. It is good also as a structure only provided. For example, the configuration may be such that the firing ball detection sensor 84 is not provided and the reader device 85 is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to measure the number of game balls B1 that are fired or fired based on the reading result of the reader device 85.

  (43) Instead of the return ball detection sensor 124, a reader device that can read the ID information from the game ball B1 that has become the return ball may be provided. Even in this case, the number of game balls B1 that have become return balls can be measured based on the read result of the return ball reader device. In addition to the return ball detection sensor 124, a return ball reader device may be provided.

  (44) The configuration of the control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arbitrary as long as each function can be secured. For example, the operation control unit 141 may be controlled not by the payout control board 161 but by the management control board 171. Further, a part or all functions of the management unit 131 may be included in the main control board 151 or may be included in the payout control board 161.

  (45) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the management unit 131 is provided with both the medium insertion port 133 and the medium discharge port 134. Both the input and output of the storage medium M are performed in one medium opening. It is good also as composition which is performed.

  Further, the storage medium M is not limited to a configuration in which a general-purpose medium is used, and a configuration in which a medium dedicated to each person, such as a membership card, is used. In this case, each of the game hall customers will have the dedicated medium, and data on the number of unused game balls and unused amount of data will be written on the medium, and if it is used, it will be managed. Data is rewritten in the unit 131 or the like. Further, in the configuration in which the dedicated medium is used in this way, the medium may be both inserted and ejected through one medium opening provided in the management unit 131. In addition, in this configuration, when exchanging with drinks or cigarettes using remaining ball information, the above-mentioned dedicated medium in which the remaining ball information used for exchange or product information to be exchanged is written is managed. It is good also as a structure discharged | emitted from the unit 131. FIG.

  In addition, in the configuration in which a dedicated medium is used as described above, when the remaining sphere information is used to exchange for drinks or cigarettes, the remaining sphere information is written or the product information to be exchanged is The written general-purpose medium may be ejected. In this case, the management unit 131 preferably has a configuration in which an opening for using a dedicated medium and an opening for using a general-purpose medium are separately provided as the medium opening. For example, a configuration in which one opening for both loading and discharging of a dedicated medium and one opening for both loading and discharging of a general-purpose medium is preferable.

  (46) The payout side MPU 162 measures the monitoring time at the time of power outage after receiving the power outage command from the main side MPU 152 after receiving the power outage signal from the second power outage monitoring board 165. In such a situation, another command such as a prize ball command received from the main MPU 152 may be stored and held. In this case, in a configuration in which a power failure signal is output from different power failure monitoring boards 155 and 165 to the main side MPU 152 and the payout side MPU 162, it becomes possible to suitably manage prize balls.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. In gaming machines that use gaming media to play games,
The gaming machine (game ball B1) has identification means (IC tag 181) capable of outputting identification information.

  According to the feature A1, it is possible to easily determine whether the gaming medium is legitimate by reading the identification information from the gaming medium used in the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to manage game media suitably.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the identification unit includes an antenna member (antenna member 183) that can transmit the identification information to a reception unit (reader device 85).

  According to the feature A2, the identification information can be easily read.

Feature A3. The identification means is provided so as not to exist on the peripheral surface of the game medium,
The game machine according to Feature A2, wherein the game medium is formed so that identification information of the identification means can be transmitted to the outside of the game medium.

  According to the feature A3, it is possible to facilitate the reading of the identification information while preventing a direct external force from being applied to the identification means when the game medium is used.

Feature A4. The identification means is entirely embedded in the game medium,
The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein at least a part of a region between the surface of the gaming medium and the identification unit is formed of a non-metallic material.

  According to the feature A4, it is possible to protect the identification means while allowing the identification information to be transmitted to the outside.

  Feature A5. The game medium is characterized in that weight pieces (weight pieces 184) having a larger weight per unit volume than the base portion are dispersedly arranged with respect to the base portion formed of the non-metallic material. A gaming machine according to Feature A4.

  When a game medium is formed using a non-metallic material, there is a concern that the game medium will be extremely light compared to a conventional metal game medium, but according to Feature A5, Since the game medium has a weight piece, it can have a certain weight. Further, since the weight pieces are arranged in a distributed manner, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while enabling transmission of identification information to the outside of the game medium.

Feature A6. Receiving means (reader device 85) for receiving the identification information from the game medium;
Using the identification information received by the receiving means, a monitoring process executing means for executing a monitoring process for the game medium (a function for executing an ID monitoring process in the payout side MPU 162);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, comprising:

  According to the feature A6, it is possible to monitor the game medium using the identification information in the gaming machine itself.

Feature A7. Presence detection means (launching ball detection sensor 84) for detecting that the game medium is present in a predetermined area,
The receiving means receives the identification information from the game medium detected by the presence detecting means as being present in the predetermined area;
The monitoring processing execution means determines whether the receiving means has received the identification information when the presence detecting means detects that the game medium is present in the predetermined area as the monitoring processing. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, characterized in that when the determination is made and the identification information is not received, a special process (step S2109) is executed.

  According to the feature A7, when an unauthorized gaming medium having no identification information is thrown into the gaming machine, it can be dealt with.

Feature A8. A storage part (ball tray part 71) for storing the game medium;
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 34) for launching the game medium stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature A7, wherein the predetermined area is present upstream of the gaming area with reference to the flow of the gaming medium from the storage portion toward the gaming area.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to grasp that the non-regular game medium exists at a timing before the game medium flows down the game area. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act using the non-regular game medium is performed, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from being given a profit.

Feature A9. A storage part (ball tray part 71) for storing the game medium;
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 34) for launching the game medium stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Circulation means (collection unit for discharge 101) for supplying the game medium discharged from the game area to the storage unit without discharging the game medium to the outside of the game machine;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8, comprising:

  According to the feature A9, since the game media is circulated in the game machine without being discharged from the game machine after use, the total number of game media required in the game hall can be suppressed. However, in such a configuration, when an irregular gaming medium is inserted into a gaming machine, the gaming medium circulates in the gaming machine, so that it is frequently used in the gaming machine. It will be. On the other hand, since the game medium is monitored using the identification information, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the game medium is legitimate through the presence / absence of reception of the identification information.

  Feature A10. The monitoring process executing means monitors the number of game media circulating in the gaming machine using the reception result of the identification information in the receiving means as the monitoring process. The gaming machine according to Feature A9.

  According to the feature A10, it is possible to monitor the number of game media as well as monitoring whether or not an unauthorized game medium is inserted using the identification information.

  Feature A11. The receiving means is from the game medium existing in a predetermined area included in a passing area from the storage section to the game area, discharged from the game area and returned to the storage section by the circulation means, The gaming machine according to Feature A9 or A10, wherein the gaming machine receives identification information.

  According to the feature A11, it is possible to monitor the game medium using the identification information during a normal game in which the game medium is to be launched toward the game area.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A11, wherein the game media circulated using the circulation means have different identification information.

  According to the feature A12, since different identification information is set for each game medium, each game medium can be individually monitored. In particular, when the configuration of the feature A10 is provided and the number of game media is monitored, each game media can be individually recognized even in a situation where each game media is circulating in an irregular order. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the number of times of monitoring and the configuration for monitoring. For example, during normal games, game media will flow down the game area, so each game medium will circulate in an irregular order, but a configuration that uses individual identification information for monitoring Therefore, it is difficult to be affected by this irregularity during monitoring. Therefore, it is possible to monitor the number of game media even during a normal game.

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, further comprising identification information storage means (ID information storage area 164d) for storing each piece of identification information of the game medium circulated using the circulation means.

  According to feature A13, when the identification information is received by the receiving means, it is determined whether or not the received identification information is authentic by determining whether or not the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. Can be grasped. As a result, even when an unauthorized gaming medium capable of transmitting the identification information is inserted, it is possible to cope with it.

  Feature A14. The game according to Feature A13, further comprising storage execution means (a function of executing ID acquisition processing in the payout side MPU 162) for storing the identification information received by the reception means in the identification information storage means. Machine.

  According to the feature A14, since the identification information received by the receiving means provided in the gaming machine is stored in the identification information storage means, the gaming machine is used when the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. There is no need to input identification information or output identification information from the outside. Thereby, workability in the case of storing identification information is improved.

  Feature A15. When the process for storing the identification information in the identification information storage means is executed by the storage execution means, the storage time control means (launch control) that causes the game medium to move along a route that does not flow down the game area. The gaming machine according to Feature A14, further comprising a function of executing a launch control process for ID registration in the device 65).

  According to the feature A15, when the identification information is stored, it is not necessary for the game medium to flow down the game area, so that the operation time when the identification information is stored can be shortened.

Feature A16. A guiding portion (inner rail portion 33a, outer rail portion 33b) for guiding the gaming medium launched from the launching unit to the upper part of the gaming area;
The firing means includes
A launch rail (launch rail 81) for guiding the game medium provided from the storage portion side toward the guide portion;
Firing operation means (solenoid 82) for firing the game medium by causing a predetermined portion to collide with the game medium held on the launch rail;
With
The gaming machine collects the game medium that has flowed back through the guiding section without reaching the upper part of the gaming area although it has reached the guiding section, and returns the gaming medium to the storage section (return) A recovery unit 121 for balls,
The storage control means controls the firing operation means so that the game medium is fired at a firing strength at which the game medium is collected by the collecting means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A16, it is possible to use an existing configuration with respect to circulation of the game medium when shortening the work when storing the identification information.

  Feature A17. The monitoring process execution means determines whether or not all the identification information stored in the identification information storage means has been received by the reception means within the range of a predetermined monitoring period as the monitoring process, The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A16, wherein special processing (step S2122) is executed when the identification information has not been received.

  According to the feature A17, it is possible to monitor whether or not the game medium is jammed in the passage route of the game medium such as a game area using the identification information.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature A group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. These gaming machines are played using a predetermined game medium.

  For example, in the case of a pachinko machine, a game ball is used as a game medium. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the game ball launch mechanism based on the player's launch operation. Then, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when the launched game ball enters the entrance part provided in the game area.

  For example, in the case of a slot machine, medals are used as game media. When the start lever is operated after the player performs a medal insertion operation, the reel starts to rotate, and the reel stops rotating based on the stop button operation by the player. When the reel is stopped, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when a symbol or a combination of symbols corresponding to the privilege is granted at a predetermined effective position visible from the front of the slot machine. Is done.

  In addition to pachinko machines and slot machines, there are also known game machines (hereinafter also referred to as “integrated game machines”) in which games similar to slot machines are played using game balls instead of medals as game media. .

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, it is preferable that management of game media to be used is appropriately performed.

  For example, in the case of a slot machine and the above-mentioned integrated gaming machine, a game is generally performed using a game medium lent out in a game hall, but a game medium that is not lent out in the game hall is used. An illegal act of playing a game is assumed.

  Further, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine, an illegal act of playing a game using a game ball smaller than the game ball used in the game hall is assumed. In this case, because the non-regular game ball is smaller than the regular game ball, it is easy for a ball to enter the entrance, resulting in a disadvantage to the game hall. End up.

  In addition, in a so-called enclosed pachinko machine in which game balls are circulated and used in one pachinko machine, the non-regular game balls as described above continue to circulate in the pachinko machine. It is assumed that the frequency of fire will increase. If it does so, the disadvantage which a game hall suffers will become great. Furthermore, in the case of the enclosed pachinko machine, if the number of game balls circulating in the pachinko machine is extremely reduced, it is impossible to continue normal games.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. In gaming machines where games are played using game media,
The number of game media stored in the possible number storage means is configured so that the game media can be used in the game for the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 164b). Is updated by the updating means (function for executing return management processing in the payout side MPU 162, the operation unit 141 in the first embodiment, the operation panel unit 191 in the second embodiment),
The updating means includes
Subtraction number specifying means for specifying the number of game media to be subtracted for a purpose different from that of the game (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1503 and the processing of step S1508 in the payout side MPU 162, and partial return) Sphere information storage area 164c, a function of executing the process of step S2402 in the payout side MPU 162 in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2507 in the payout side MPU 162 in the third embodiment),
The information in the possible number storage means is updated so as to be subtracted from the number of usable game media by the number of game media specified by the subtraction number specifying means, and stored in the possible number storage means at the time of the update. Subtraction execution means that enables subtraction of a number smaller than the usable number (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S1514 in the payout side MPU 162; in the second embodiment, in the payout side MPU 162) A function of executing the process of step S2405, a function of executing the process of step S2509 in the payout-side MPU 162 in the third embodiment),

A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, since the information on the number of usable game media is stored in the possible number storage means, the actual game media can be substituted with the information on the number of game media. It is possible to reduce the total number of game media.

  In addition, when the information on the number of usable game media stored in the possible number storage means is used for purposes other than games such as exchange of goods in a game hall, only a few minutes according to the purpose of use are used. Can be used. As a result, when the actual game medium is used as information on the number of game media as described above, the information on the number of game media can be used for exchanging items in the game hall.

  As described above, the total number of game media in the game hall can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B2. A storage unit (ball tray unit 71) for storing game media;
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 34) for launching the game medium stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Circulation means (discharge recovery unit 101) for supplying the game medium discharged from the game area to the storage unit without discharging it to the outside of the gaming machine;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, characterized in that the player is prevented from touching gaming media circulating in the gaming machine including the gaming media stored in the storage unit.

  According to the feature B2, even if the game medium flows down the game area, the game machine circulates in the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to determine the number of game media used in the game machine, and accordingly, the game hall It is possible to suppress the total number of game media in.

  However, in this configuration, since the player cannot take out the game medium circulating in the gaming machine, the conventional exchange in the game hall in which the game medium is exchanged for a product such as a drink cannot be performed. End up. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature B1 is provided and information on the number of game media can be used for exchanging products in the game hall, the game media is circulated in the gaming machine. Even so, conventional exchanges in the game hall are possible.

  Feature B3. In the situation where the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means is subtracted by the execution of the game, the update means suppresses the subtraction by the subtraction execution means (the process of step S1401 in the payout side MPU 162) The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, further comprising:

  According to the feature B3, the situation where the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means is subtracted for the execution of the game and the situation where the information is subtracted for the exchange of goods etc. overlap. It is prevented. Thereby, it is suppressed that the update process of the information of possible number memory | storage means will be complicated. In addition, when the complexity is suppressed, priority is given to the use of information on the number of game media in the game, so that the progress of the game can be prioritized.

  The following configuration can be considered as a specific configuration when the configuration of the feature B3 is applied to a pachinko machine.

Firing operation means (launching operation device 36) operated by a player;
Based on the operation of the launch operation means, launch means (game ball launch mechanism 34) for launching the game medium toward the game area;
With
The said suppression means is a structure which suppresses the subtraction by the said subtraction execution means on the condition that the said firing operation means is operated at least one condition.

  Feature B4. The updating means outputs information on the number of game media specified by the subtraction number specifying means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1512 in the payout MPU 162 and the management unit 131). In the second embodiment, the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3, which includes a function of executing the process of step S2404 in the payout side MPU 162 and a management unit 131).

  According to the feature B4, since information on the number of game media to be subtracted is output, the information on the number of game media can be used for exchanging merchandise in the game hall.

  The following configuration can be considered as a specific configuration of the feature B4.

  The update means includes a medium discharge means (a function for executing the process of step S1512 in the payout side MPU 162, the management unit 131) for discharging the storage medium in which the information on the number of game media specified by the subtraction number specifying means is written. Configuration that has.

  Feature B5. When the updating means specifies that all the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means should be discharged, the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means is deleted. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, further comprising: an erasing unit (a function of executing the process of step S1412 in the payout side MPU 162).

  According to the feature B5, when the player finishes the game, the player discharges all the information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means, and when exchanging goods in the game hall, the player stores in the possible number storage means. A part of the information on the number of stored game media can be discharged.

  Feature B6. The update means is provided so as to be operable by a player, and a subtraction operation means (in the first embodiment) that allows a subtraction instruction for a number smaller than the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, comprising an increase instruction button 144, a decrease instruction button 145, an enter button 146, and designated operation areas 194a to 194d in the second embodiment.

  According to the feature B6, when exchanging for goods using information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage means, the player only has to operate the subtraction operation means. The operability for the user can be improved.

  Feature B7. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, wherein the subtraction operation means includes setting operation means (an increase instruction button 144 and a decrease instruction button 145) capable of setting a subtraction number to be instructed.

  According to the feature B7, it is possible to determine the number of game media to be used for exchanging with a product by operating the setting operation unit, so there is no need to provide an operation unit for each type of product to be exchanged. . Therefore, the number of operation means can be reduced.

  Feature B8. The subtraction operation means includes a plurality of number-corresponding operation means (designated operation areas 194a to 194d) in which a subtraction number to be designated is determined in advance and the subtraction numbers are different from one another. B6 or B7 The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B8, since the player only has to operate the operation means corresponding to the product to be exchanged, the operability for the player can be improved.

  Feature B9. The update means is provided so as to be operable by a player, and is a total subtraction operation means (all return in the first embodiment) that enables an instruction to subtract the total number of game media stored in the possible number storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B8, comprising a button 143 and a total return operation area 196) in the second embodiment.

  According to the feature B9, since the player only has to operate the operation means corresponding to the case where the game is finished and the case where the game is exchanged, the operability for the player can be improved. It becomes possible.

Feature B10. The updating means includes receiving means (receiving section 201) for receiving information on the number of game media to be subtracted from the game hall side,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein the subtraction number specifying means specifies the number of game media to be subtracted based on information received by the receiving means.

  According to the feature B10, it is possible to perform the subtraction of the number of game media at the time of exchanging with a product with the operation on the game hall side as at least one condition.

  Feature B11. The subtraction execution means performs an operation that allows the player to perform subtraction of the number of game media corresponding to the received information when the reception means receives information on the number of game media to be subtracted. The gaming machine according to Feature B10, which is performed on the condition that

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to prevent the information on the number of game media from being subtracted against the player's intention.

  Note that the following configuration is conceivable as a specific configuration of the feature B11.

The update means includes permission operation means operated to allow the subtraction execution means to execute subtraction when the reception means receives information on the number of game media to be subtracted.
A configuration in which an operation of the permission operation means is included in an operation that can be performed by the player.

  The invention of the feature group B is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. These gaming machines are played using a predetermined game medium.

  For example, in the case of a pachinko machine, a game ball is used as a game medium. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the game ball launch mechanism based on the player's launch operation. Then, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when the launched game ball enters the entrance part provided in the game area.

  For example, in the case of a slot machine, medals are used as game media. When the start lever is operated after the player performs a medal insertion operation, the reel starts to rotate, and the reel stops rotating based on the stop button operation by the player. When the reel is stopped, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when a symbol or a combination of symbols corresponding to the privilege is granted at a predetermined effective position visible from the front of the slot machine. Is done.

  In addition to pachinko machines and slot machines, there are also known game machines (hereinafter also referred to as “integrated game machines”) in which games similar to slot machines are played using game balls instead of medals as game media. .

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, it is preferable that management of game media to be used is appropriately performed.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A storage part (ball tray part 71) for storing game balls;
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 34) for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Within the range of the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 164b), the launch control means (the game ball use in the payout side MPU 162) that enables the launch means to launch game balls. A function of executing a management process, a launch control device 65);
Circulation means (collection unit for discharge 101) for supplying game balls discharged from the game area to the storage unit without discharging to the outside of the gaming machine;
Specific entry means (upper operation port 43, lower operation port 44) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Variable entry means (variable winning device 42) provided in the game area, capable of transitioning to an open state and capable of transitioning to a closed state;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S701 in the main MPU 152) for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the specific entry means;
A determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S707 in the main MPU 152) for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is winning correspondence information;
Display means (special drawing display unit 47) having a display unit on which a variable display of the pattern is performed;
The result corresponding to the determination result of the determination unit for the special information when starting the variation display of the pattern based on the acquisition of the special information by the information acquisition unit and ending the variation display of the pattern Display control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S707 to S709 in the main MPU 152) to perform display;
When the determination means determines that the winning correspondence information and the result display corresponding to the determination is performed, the gaming state is shifted to a specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed. State transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S710 to S713 in the main MPU 152);
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means (function of executing step S412 in the main MPU 152, steps S1013 and S1014 in the payout MPU 162) Processing function), and
With
A configuration in which a player directly throws a game ball into the storage unit is suppressed,
When the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the winning correspondence information, the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means corresponds to the number of game balls equal to or less than a reference number. In such a case, special notification control means (a function of executing the process of step S2304 in the main MPU 152, the special notification is executed at a timing before the timing at which the result display of the special information is performed, A gaming machine comprising a sound emission control device 62 and a display control device 63).

  According to the feature C1, even when the game ball flows down the game area, the game ball circulates in the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to determine the number of game balls used in the game machine, and accordingly, the game hall It is possible to suppress the total number of game balls in.

  However, in this configuration, since the player cannot directly throw the game ball into the storage unit, the transition to the specific game state suddenly occurs in a situation where the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is small In such a case, there is a concern that there may be a disadvantage to the player due to a lack of usable game balls. On the other hand, if there is a possibility of shifting to a specific gaming state in a situation where the number of usable game balls is less than or equal to the reference number, before the result display that triggers the transition to the specific gaming state is made Special notification is executed. Thereby, the player can replenish information on the number of usable game balls in advance before shifting to the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages.

Feature C2. Acquisition information storage means (holding storage area 154b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is the target of determination by the determination unit, the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination A destination specifying means (function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main MPU 152),
With
The special notification control means is the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the winning correspondence information, and the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is below a reference number The special notification may be executed at a timing prior to the start of the variable display times of the pattern for the special information. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, which is characterized.

  According to the feature C2, it is possible to execute the special notification at an early stage, and for the player, the information on the number of usable game balls should be replenished with a margin until the game state shifts to the specific game state. Is possible.

Feature C3. As a determination result of the determination means, a predetermined game in which opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed in a manner in which a game ball is expected to enter the variable pitching means lower than in the case of the winning correspondence information. Predetermined response results (low wins and high wins results) that shift the gaming state to the state are included,
When the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence result, the special notification control unit is independent of the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage unit, The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or C2, wherein the special notification is not executed.

  According to the feature C3, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the special notification is performed, and the possibility that the execution of the special notification impairs the original game performance is reduced.

Feature C4. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the cash correspondence information is stored in the input information storage means (frequency information storage area 164a) in which cash correspondence information is stored when cash is inserted, Cash correspondence information is converted into information on the number of gaming balls and stored in the possible number storage means,
The special notification control means is a game in which the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is equal to or less than a reference number when the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the winning correspondence information. Even if it corresponds to the number of balls, the special notification is not executed when the cash correspondence information is stored in the input information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C3.

  When cash correspondence information is stored, it is possible to convert the number of usable game balls to information early, so there is little information on the number of game balls in a situation where cash correspondence information is stored. Even so, the disadvantage suffered by the player in the event of sudden transition to a specific gaming state is low. Under such circumstances, according to the feature C4, the execution of the special notification is restricted regardless of the information on the number of game balls in the situation where the cash correspondence information is stored. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the special notification is executed, and the possibility that the execution of the special notification impairs the original game performance is reduced.

Feature C5. A storage part (ball tray part 71) for storing game balls;
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 34) for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Within the range of the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 164b), the launch control means (the game ball use in the payout side MPU 162) that enables the launch means to launch game balls. A function of executing a management process, a launch control device 65);
Specific entry means (upper operation port 43, lower operation port 44) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Variable entry means (variable winning device 42) provided in the game area, capable of transitioning to an open state and capable of transitioning to a closed state;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S701 in the main MPU 152) for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the specific entry means;
A determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S707 in the main MPU 152) for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is winning correspondence information;
Display means (special drawing display unit 47) having a display unit on which a variable display of the pattern is performed;
The result corresponding to the determination result of the determination unit for the special information when starting the variation display of the pattern based on the acquisition of the special information by the information acquisition unit and ending the variation display of the pattern Display control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S707 to S709 in the main MPU 152) to perform display;
When the determination means determines that the winning correspondence information and the result display corresponding to the determination is performed, the gaming state is shifted to a specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed. State transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S710 to S713 in the main MPU 152);
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means (function of executing step S412 in the main MPU 152, steps S1013 and S1014 in the payout MPU 162) Processing function), and
With
A configuration in which a player directly throws a game ball into the storage unit is suppressed,
When the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the winning correspondence information, the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means corresponds to the number of game balls equal to or less than a reference number. In such a case, special notification control means (a function of executing the process of step S2304 in the main MPU 152, the special notification is executed at a timing before the timing at which the result display of the special information is performed, A gaming machine comprising a sound emission control device 62 and a display control device 63).

  According to the feature C5, since the player cannot directly insert the game ball into the storage unit, the possibility that the non-regular game ball is used is reduced, and management of the game ball to be used is appropriately performed. Is possible.

  However, in this configuration, since the player cannot directly throw the game ball into the storage unit, the transition to the specific game state suddenly occurs in a situation where the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is small In such a case, there is a concern that there may be a disadvantage to the player due to a lack of usable game balls. On the other hand, if there is a possibility of shifting to a specific gaming state in a situation where the number of usable game balls is less than or equal to the reference number, before the result display that triggers the transition to the specific gaming state is made Special notification is executed. Thereby, the player can replenish information on the number of usable game balls in advance before shifting to the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A storage part (ball tray part 71) for storing game balls;
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 34) for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Circulation means (collection unit for discharge 101) for supplying game balls discharged from the game area to the storage unit without discharging to the outside of the gaming machine;
Monitoring process execution means for executing a monitoring process for monitoring the number of game balls circulating in the gaming machine (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2115 to S2122 in the payout side MPU 162; In the embodiment, the function of executing the number monitoring process in the payout side MPU 162),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, even if the game ball flows down the game area, the game ball circulates in the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to determine the number of game balls used in the game machine, and accordingly, the game hall It is possible to suppress the total number of game balls in.

  However, in this configuration, if an unauthorized gaming ball is illegally inserted into the gaming machine, the unauthorized gaming ball will continue to circulate in the gaming machine. In addition, if a large number of game balls flow out of the gaming machine, the game cannot be continued normally. On the other hand, since the number of game balls is monitored, it is possible to cope with such a situation.

  Feature D2. Even if the shooting operation means is operated by the player during the monitoring period in which the monitoring process is executed, a prohibiting means (payout side) that prohibits the game ball from being discharged from the shooting means in a manner corresponding to the operation. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, further comprising a function of executing the process of Step S2603 in the MPU 162.

  According to the feature D2, it is possible to monitor the number of game balls without considering the influence of the game ball launch based on the operation of the launch operation means.

Feature D3. When the monitoring process is executed, a monitoring time control means (a function of executing the process of step S2608 in the payout side MPU 162, the launch control device 65) that moves the game ball so as to pass through a predetermined route; ,
Presence detecting means (launching ball detection sensor 84) for detecting the presence of a game ball in a predetermined area on the predetermined path;
With
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the monitoring process execution means executes the monitoring process using a detection result of the presence detection means.

  According to the feature D3, since the number of game balls is monitored by sequentially detecting the moving game balls, it is possible to monitor the number of game balls while fixing the position of the detection means of the game balls. It becomes.

  Feature D4. In the monitoring period in which the monitoring process is executed, the passage has a passage blocking unit (communication shutter mechanism 211) that prevents the game ball passing through the predetermined path from returning to the storage unit. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D4, since the game ball once counted at the time of monitoring the number of game balls is prevented from passing again through a predetermined route, the number of game balls can be preferably monitored.

  Feature D5. The gaming machine according to Feature D3 or D4, wherein the predetermined route is a route that does not flow down the gaming area.

  According to the feature D5, when monitoring of the number of game balls is executed, it is not necessary for the game ball to flow down the game area, so that the time required for performing the monitoring can be shortened.

Feature D6. A guide part (inner rail part 33a, outer rail part 33b) for guiding the game ball launched from the launching means to the upper part of the game area;
The firing means includes
A launch rail (launch rail 81) for guiding the game ball provided from the storage portion side toward the guide portion,
Firing operation means (solenoid 82) for firing the game ball by causing a predetermined portion to collide with the game ball held on the launch rail;
With
The gaming machine collects a game ball that has reached the guide unit but has flowed back through the guide unit without reaching the upper part of the game area, and returns the game ball toward the storage unit (return ball) Recovery unit 121),
The monitoring time control means controls the firing operation means so that the game ball is fired at a firing strength at which the game ball is collected by the collecting means. Game machines.

  According to the feature D6, it is possible to use an existing configuration for circulation of game balls when the time for monitoring the number of game balls is shortened.

  Feature D7. As a result of monitoring the number of game balls, the monitoring process execution means is different in special processing depending on whether the number of game balls circulating in the gaming machine is greater than a specific number or less (step S2615, step S2615). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the gaming machine executes S2619).

  According to the feature D7, it is possible to appropriately cope with an abnormality in the number of game balls.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A storage part (ball tray part 71) for storing game balls;
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 34) for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Circulation means (collection unit for discharge 101) for supplying game balls discharged from the game area to the storage unit without discharging to the outside of the gaming machine;
A ball entry means (general winning opening 41) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
With
It is a configuration in which the player directly throws the game ball into the storage unit and takes out the game ball from the storage unit,
Further, the launching means can launch game balls for information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 164b),
The information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is fired by the launch means by the update means (function for executing game ball management processing and return management processing in the payout side MPU 162, operation unit 141). In this case, the game ball number is updated so as to be subtracted, and when the game ball enters the ball entry means, it is updated so that the number of game balls is added by the number corresponding thereto,
The updating means includes
Information output means for outputting information on the total number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means when the player performs an information output operation (function for executing the process of step S1411 in the payout side MPU 162); ,
An erasure unit (a function for executing the process of step S1412 in the payout side MPU 162) for erasing information on the number of game media stored in the possible number storage unit when the information output unit performs information output;
Even if the information output operation is performed, the output prohibiting means for prohibiting the information output by the information output means (the processing of steps S1401, S1403, and S1404 in the payout side MPU 162 is performed even if the information output operation is performed. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, since the information on the number of usable game balls is stored in the possible number storage means, it becomes possible to substitute the actual game ball with the information on the number of game balls, and in the game hall It is possible to reduce the total number of game balls. In addition, even if the game ball flows down the game area, it will circulate in the game machine, so that it is possible to determine the number of game balls used in the game machine, and accordingly, the number of game balls in the game hall It becomes possible to suppress the total number.

  In this configuration, when a predetermined condition is established, even if an information output operation is performed, information output by the information output means is prohibited. As a result, if the information of the total number of game balls is output, it may be disadvantageous to the player, or if the information output becomes complicated, the information output operation by the player is invalidated. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the predetermined situation includes a situation in which a launch operation is performed by a player.

  According to the feature E2, information on the total number of game balls is prevented from being output in a situation where game balls are being fired. This reliably prevents the update of the information on the number of game balls accompanying the launch of the game ball and the output of the information on the total number of game balls from occurring, and the information on the number of game balls is suitably used. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature E3. The predetermined situation includes a situation in which information on the number of game balls corresponding to the incoming ball is not reflected in the information in the possible number storage unit after the game ball has entered the incoming ball means. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2.

  If the information on the number of game balls is newly added immediately after the information on the total number of game balls is output, the player needs to perform the information output operation again, which is complicated. In particular, in a configuration in which the storage medium is ejected, it becomes necessary to repeatedly eject the storage medium. On the other hand, according to the feature E3, the occurrence of the event can be suppressed.

Feature E4. Specific entry means (upper operation port 43, lower operation port 44) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Variable entry means (variable winning device 42) provided in the game area, capable of transitioning to an open state and capable of transitioning to a closed state;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S701 in the main MPU 152) for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the specific entry means;
A determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S707 in the main MPU 152) for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is winning correspondence information;
When the determination means determines that the winning correspondence information is present, the state transition means (step S710 in the main MPU 152) shifts the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed. A function of executing the process of step S713);
With
The update means is configured to update the information in the possible number storage means so that the number of game balls is added by a number corresponding to a game ball entering the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the predetermined situation includes a situation in which a gaming state is the specific gaming state.

  If the information on the total number of game balls is output in the specific game state, a situation may occur in which the game balls cannot be launched even though the game state is in the specific game state. On the other hand, according to the feature E4, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the event.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A storage part (ball tray part 71) for storing game balls;
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 34) for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Within the range of the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 164b), the launch control means (the game ball use in the payout side MPU 162) that enables the launch means to launch game balls. A function of executing a management process, a launch control device 65);
A ball entry means (general winning opening 41) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the ball entry means (the function of executing the process of step S412 in the main MPU 152, the process of steps S1013 and S1014 in the payout MPU 162) Function to execute)
With
It is a configuration in which the player directly throws the game ball into the storage unit and takes out the game ball from the storage unit,
The game ball discharged from the gaming area is configured to be discharged from the gaming machine,
Drive control means for driving the payout means to pay out the game balls toward the storage section so that the number of game balls stored in the storage section becomes a specific number (stabilization of the storage balls in the payout side MPU 162) A gaming machine having a function of executing processing).

  According to the feature F1, since the information on the number of usable game balls is stored in the possible number storage means, it is possible to substitute the actual game ball with the information on the number of game balls. It is possible to reduce the total number of game balls.

  In this case, the payout means is driven so that the number of game balls stored in the storage unit becomes a specific number while the game balls flowing down the game area and discharged from the game area are discharged from the gaming machine. Be controlled. This makes it possible to easily manage the number of game balls compared to a configuration in which game balls circulate in the gaming machine.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A storage part (ball tray part 71) for storing game balls;
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 34) for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Within the range of the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means (remaining ball information storage area 164b), the launch control means (the game ball use in the payout side MPU 162) that enables the launch means to launch game balls. A function of executing a management process, a launch control device 65);
Specific entry means (upper operation port 43, lower operation port 44) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Variable entry means (variable winning device 42) provided in the game area, capable of transitioning to an open state and capable of transitioning to a closed state;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S701 in the main MPU 152) for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the specific entry means;
A determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S707 in the main MPU 152) for executing a determination process on the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Production control means (sound emission control device 62, display control device 63) for controlling production execution means (symbol display device 46a) so that the production is executed;
A specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode) in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed after the determination result of the determining means becomes the specific determination result (low-probable big hit result or most advantageous big hit result) ) State transition means (function to execute the processing of steps S710 to S713 in the main MPU 152),
Benefit granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means (function of executing step S412 in the main MPU 152, steps S1013 and S1014 in the payout MPU 162) Processing function), and
With
A configuration in which a player directly throws a game ball into the storage unit is suppressed,
The production control means includes
Execution control means (process of steps S3101 to S3109 in the sound emission control device 62) that causes the effect execution means to execute the effect determined to be executed by the effect lottery performed based on the contents of the special information A function of executing the display control device 63),
When the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means corresponds to the number of game balls equal to or less than a reference number. In the case where the production lottery is performed, the production included in the production lottery of the production lottery is not related to the result of the production lottery at the timing before the transition to the specific gaming state is triggered by the special information. A specific control means (sound emission control device 62) that is executed or that an effect different from the effect corresponding to the result of the effect lottery and included in the lottery of the effect lottery is executed. A function of executing the effect content change process in the display control device 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, since the player cannot directly throw the game ball into the storage unit, the possibility that the non-regular game ball is used is reduced, and the used game ball is appropriately managed. Is possible.

  However, in this configuration, since the player cannot directly throw the game ball into the storage unit, the transition to the specific game state suddenly occurs in a situation where the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is small In such a case, there is a concern that there may be a disadvantage to the player due to a lack of usable game balls. On the other hand, if there is a possibility of transitioning to a specific gaming state in a situation where the number of usable game balls is less than or equal to the reference number, a predetermined effect is forced before the transition to the specific gaming state is performed. Is executed automatically. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to replenish information on the number of available game balls, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages.

  Furthermore, as a method for urging that information on the number of available game balls to be supplemented as described above, an effect included in the effect lottery is used. This not only reduces the amount of data required for gaming machines, but also makes it possible to encourage players to replenish information on the number of available game balls as part of the presentation, giving the player a sense of incongruity. It is possible to achieve the above effects while reducing the possibility of being lost.

Feature G2. The execution control means, when the special information corresponds to the specific determination result, at a timing prior to the transition to the specific gaming state triggered by the special information ( The first effect or the premium effect) is executed by the effect executing means with a predetermined probability,
The specific control means is a case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, and information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is less than a reference number In the case where the number of gaming balls corresponds, the effect execution means executes the effect in the specific mode at a timing before the transition to the specific game state triggered by the special information. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be performed.

  According to the feature G2, if there is a possibility of shifting to the specific gaming state in a situation where the number of usable game balls is equal to or less than the reference number, the specific mode effect is performed before the transition to the specific gaming state is performed. Executed. Then, the effect of the specific mode is an effect that is executed with a predetermined probability when the transition to the specific game state is to be performed. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to replenish information on the number of available game balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages. Furthermore, the effect of a specific aspect is used as a method for prompting the user to replenish information on the number of available game balls as described above. This not only reduces the amount of data required for gaming machines, but also makes it possible to encourage players to replenish information on the number of available game balls as part of the presentation, giving the player a sense of incongruity. It is possible to achieve the above effects while reducing the possibility of being lost.

  The “predetermined probability” is a probability that is greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Feature G3. The effect of the specific mode is an effect indicating that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed thereafter, or an effect indicating that the degree of expectation that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed thereafter is high. The gaming machine according to Feature G2, characterized by:

  According to the feature G3, as an effect of the specific mode, an effect indicating that the transition to the specific game state is performed thereafter, or an effect indicating that the degree of expectation that the transition to the specific game state is performed thereafter is high is executed. Therefore, in the configuration in which the information that the number of usable game balls should be replenished using a normal effect, the player can easily recognize the necessity of replenishment.

Feature G4. Acquisition information storage means (holding storage area 154b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is a target of determination by the determination unit, the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination A destination specifying means (function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main MPU 152),
With
The execution control unit is configured so that the special notification effect determined to be executed by the effect lottery based on the content of the specification result of the destination specifying unit is before the predetermined special information is determined by the determination unit. It is made to be executed by the production execution means at the timing of
The specific control means is a case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, and information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is less than a reference number The special notification effect is executed in a manner unrelated to the result of the effect lottery at a timing before the special information is determined by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that:

  According to the feature G4, the special notification effect corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is executed at a timing before the special information is determined by the determination unit. is there. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the order to be determined by the determination means is the target of the determination regarding the special information that is later. A game of confirming or estimating the result according to the content of the special notification effect is added, and the game is diversified.

  In this case, a special notification effect is used to notify that information on the number of available game balls should be supplemented. This makes it possible to promptly notify that information on the number of available game balls should be replenished, and for the player, until the information on the number of available game balls shifts to a specific game state. It is possible to replenish with sufficient margin.

Feature G5. The effect execution means performs the individual display of the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means and corresponding to the number of special information not determined by the determination means. The number can be reported,
The execution control means adjusts the individual display mode corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification effect among the individual displays based on the result of the effect lottery, thereby It is to execute the notification effect,
The specific control means is a case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, and information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is less than a reference number When the number of game balls corresponds to the number of game balls, the individual display mode corresponding to the special information is the result of the effect lottery at a timing before the special information is determined by the determining means. The gaming machine according to Feature G4, wherein the gaming machine has an unrelated aspect.

  According to the feature G5, in the configuration in which the special notification effect is executed using the individual display, the information on the number of usable game balls can be obtained by adjusting the individual display mode for the special information corresponding to the specific determination result. Is notified that it should be replenished. This makes it clear to the player how long the information on the number of available game balls should be replenished, and the replenishment work can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature G6. The effect control means increases the number of the individual displays when the special information is newly acquired by the information acquisition means, and the individual display when the special information is a target of determination by the determination means. Adjusting means (a function of executing the process of step S3112 in the sound emission control device 62, the display control device 63),
The specific control means is a case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, and information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is less than a reference number The feature G5 is characterized in that, when the number of game balls corresponds to the number of game balls, the mode of the individual display corresponding to the special information is changed even when the number of the individual displays is not changed. Game machines.

  According to the feature G6, when it is necessary to notify that information on the number of usable game balls should be supplemented, the mode of individual display is changed regardless of the timing of changing the number of individual displays. . In this case, it is expected that the player will be surprised by the change in the mode, and the degree of attention to the specific mode can be increased.

Feature G7. The execution control means terminates the game turn effect in a manner corresponding to the determination result of the determination means after starting the game turn effect by the effect execution means. Is determined by the effect lottery based on the content of the determination result of the determination means,
The specific control means is a case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, and information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means is less than a reference number If the number of game balls is corresponding to the number of game balls, the effects included in the lottery of the effect lottery are executed regardless of the result of the effect lottery during the game round effect triggered by the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that:

  According to the feature G7, it is possible to notify that information on the number of usable game balls should be supplemented using the game times effect. In addition, it is possible to notify that the information on the number of available game balls should be supplemented only in the game times for the special information corresponding to the specific determination result. Can be reduced.

Feature G8. As a determination result of the determination means, a predetermined game state in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed in a manner in which the game ball is expected to enter the variable pitching means less than the specific determination result (Open / close execution mode of low frequency winning mode) includes a predetermined determination result (low winning high probability winning result) that the gaming state will shift,
The execution control of the effect by the specific control means is not executed even if the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the predetermined determination result. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature G8, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which notification that the information on the number of available game balls should be supplemented is executed, and the possibility that the execution of the notification impairs the original game performance is reduced. Is done.

Feature G9. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the cash correspondence information is stored in the input information storage means (frequency information storage area 164a) in which cash correspondence information is stored when cash is inserted, Cash correspondence information is converted into information on the number of gaming balls and stored in the possible number storage means,
The execution control of the production by the specific control means is the case where the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result and the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means. Even if the information corresponds to the number of game balls equal to or less than the reference number, it is not executed when the cash correspondence information is stored in the input information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  When cash correspondence information is stored, it is possible to convert the number of usable game balls to information early, so there is little information on the number of game balls in a situation where cash correspondence information is stored. Even so, the disadvantage suffered by the player in the event of sudden transition to a specific gaming state is low. Under such circumstances, according to the feature G9, in the situation where the cash correspondence information is stored, execution of notification that the information on the number of usable game balls should be supplemented is limited regardless of the information on the number of game balls. Is done. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the frequency with which the notification is executed, and the possibility that the execution of the notification impairs the original game performance is reduced.

  Feature G10. Any of the features G1 to G9, further comprising a circulation means (discharge recovery unit 101) for supplying the game ball discharged from the game area to the storage unit without discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature G10, in the configuration in which the game balls circulate in the game machine, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  The inventions of the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, and the feature G group are effective for the following problems.

  Pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, a game ball is used as a game medium. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the game ball launch mechanism based on the player's launch operation. Then, an advantageous privilege is given to the player when the launched game ball enters the entrance part provided in the game area.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, it is preferable that management of game media to be used is appropriately performed.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33a ... Inner rail part, 33b ... Outer rail part, 34 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 36 ... Launch operation device, 42 ... Variable winning device, 43 ... Upper operation port, 44 ... Lower operation port, 47 ... Special figure display unit, 61 ... main control device, 62 ... sound emission control device, 63 ... display control device, 64 ... discharge control device, 65 ... launch control device, 71 ... ball tray, 81 ... launch rail, 82 ... solenoid , 84 ... Launch ball detection sensor, 85 ... Reader device, 101 ... Recovery unit for discharge, 121 ... Recovery unit for return ball, 131 ... Management unit, 141 ... Operation unit, 143 ... All return button, 144 ... Increase instruction button, 145 ... Decrease instruction button, 146 ... Enter button, 152 ... Main-side MPU, 154b ... Holding storage area, 162 ... Payout-side MPU, 164a ... Frequency information storage area, 164b ... Remaining sphere information storage Rear, 164c ... partial return ball information storage area, 164d ... ID information storage area, 181 ... IC tag, 183 ... antenna member, 184 ... weight piece, 191 ... operation panel section, 194a to 194d ... designated operation area, 196 ... All return operation area, 201... Receiving unit, 202... Approval button, 211.

Claims (1)

A storage section for storing game balls;
Launching means for launching the game balls stored in the storage unit toward the game area;
Within a range of information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means, the launch control means for enabling the launch of the game balls by the launch means;
Specific entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Variable entry means provided in the gaming area, capable of transitioning to an open state and capable of transitioning to a closed state;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the specific entry means;
A determination unit that executes a determination process on the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
Production control means for controlling the production execution means so that the production is executed;
State transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means is executed after the determination result of the determining means becomes the specific determination result;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on a game ball entering the variable pitching means;
With
A configuration in which a player directly throws a game ball into the storage unit is suppressed,
The production control means includes
An execution control unit that causes an effect determined to be executed by an effect lottery performed based on the content of the special information to be executed by the effect execution unit;
When the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the specific determination result, the information on the number of game balls stored in the possible number storage means corresponds to the number of game balls equal to or less than a reference number. In the case where the production lottery is performed, the production included in the production lottery of the production lottery is not related to the result of the production lottery at the timing before the transition to the specific gaming state is triggered by the special information. A specific control means that is executed, or an effect different from the effect corresponding to the result of the effect lottery and the effect included in the lottery of the effect lottery is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images